Quarterlytics / Technology / D4t4 Solutions Plc / FY2021 Annual Report

D4t4 Solutions Plc
Annual Report 2021

D4T4 · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker D4T4
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · D4t4 Solutions Plc
Loading PDF…
D4t4 Solutions plc

Annual Financial Report 2021

Fulfilling 
our mission

To be on the forefront of 

powering digital transformation 

and fulfil the marketplace need 

for customer-centricity in a  

real-time, fully compliant manner.

Strategic Report
  01  Headlines
  02  Statement by the Chairman
  04	 Statement	by	the	Chief	Executive	Officer
  08	 Chief	Financial	Officer	Report
  10	 Key	performance	indicators	(KPIs)
  12	 Customer	centricity	in	a	post-pandemic	economy
  13	 The	core	opportunity	for	D4t4
  18	 Vision	and	strategy
  20	 Customer	success	story
  22	 Tactical	plans	to	manage	challenges
  24	 Principal	risks	and	uncertainties
  26	 Corporate	responsibility
  28	 Section	172	statement

Corporate governance
  31	 Chairman’s	introduction	to	governance
  32	 Board	of	Directors
  34	 Statement	of	corporate	governance
  44	 Audit	Committee	report
  45	 Nomination	Committee	report
  46	 Remuneration	Committee	report
  47	 Directors’	Remuneration	report
  52	 Directors’	report
  55	 Statement	of	Directors’	responsibilities

Financial statements

  56	 Independent	auditor’s	report
  61	 Consolidated	income	statement
  62		 Consolidated	statement	of	changes	in	equity
  63	 Consolidated	statement	of	financial	position
  64	 Consolidated	cash	flow	statement
  65	 Company	statement	of	changes	in	equity
  66	 Company	statement	of	financial	position
  67	 Company	cash	flow	statement
  68	 Notes	to	the	financial	statements
  96	 Corporate	information

Headlines

Revenue

£22.8m
+4.6%

2021

2020

2019

ARR

£10.6m
+11.0%

2021

2020

2019

£22.8m

£21.8m

£25.2m

Revenue from sales made to all customers (excluding intra-group 
sales which are eliminated on consolidation). Reflecting transition to 
recurring revenue business model

Annual recurring revenue

£10.6m

£9.55m

£7.57m

Adjusted profit before tax

Gross profit margin

£4.5m

2021

2020

2019

62.4%

2021

2020

2019

£4.5m

£5.1m

£6.0m

62.4%

60.8%

56.6%

Profit before amortisation of intangibles, share based payment charges, 
foreign exchange gain/(loss) and restructuring costs (see KPIs) 

Gross profit (being less all direct third-party cost of sales) as a 
percentage of revenue 

Adjusted diluted EPS

9.54p

Cash balance

£14.2m
+10.9%

2021

2020

2019

9.54p

11.19p

13.89p

2021

2020

2019

£14.2m

£12.8m

£11.0m

Adjusted diluted EPS as per note 13

Cash and cash equivalents. The Group has no debt

Key Performance Indicators  page 10          

1

 
 
Statement by the Chairman

Peter Simmonds

Non-Executive  
Chairman

Despite	the	unprecedented	and	
challenging	circumstances	of	the	last	
year,	I	am	pleased	to	report	that	D4t4	
Solutions	has	continued	to	deliver	on	
its	strategic	objectives	-	increasing	
revenues	from	our			Celebrus	family	
of	software	products	and	continuing	
the	transition	to	an	Annual	Recurring	
Revenue	model	(ARR).	This	has	led	
to	increased	revenue	visibility	and	
better-quality	earnings. 

to	empower	clients	to	maximise	the	value	

Although	the	addressable	market	for	

gained	from	their	customer	data,	with	the	

the	Celebrus	FDP	is	incremental	with	

objective	of	delivering	major	uplifts	in	terms	

client	spend	often	controlled	by	a	

of	their	revenue	and	profitability.

Our position

different	budget	holder	to	the	rest	of	

the	Celebrus	offering,	its	core	focus	is	

Financial	Services	where	we	already	

During	the	year,	global	events	have	

have	strong	customer	references	and	a	

increased	the	speed	at	which	companies	

resilient	following.	This,	combined	with	the			

have	transitioned	their	businesses	online	

underlying	similarities	in	code	with	the	

and	the	volume	of	data	that	is	now	being	

already	successful	Celebrus	CDP	product,			

produced.	Enterprises	are	increasingly	

gives	me	a	high	level	of	confidence	that	

focused	on	improving	and	differentiating	

the	FDP	opportunity	represents	a	high	

their	customer	experience	in	a	crowded	

value,	low	risk	business	opportunity	

marketplace.	The	expectations	and	

worthy	of	significant	investment	to	build	a	

sophistication	of	successful	businesses	is	

parallel	and	highly	complementary	Annual	

creating	increased	demands	for	products	
which	capture	customer	experience	in	real	

time	across	a	wide	variety	of	platforms.	

This	is	resulting	in	a	real	opportunity,	as	

our	products	provide	that	real	time	data	to	

enable	and	improve	these	experiences	in	a			

relevant,	compliant	and	personalised	way.

Recurring	Revenue	stream.

Geographic	expansion	has	also	been	

an	important	driver.	During	the	year	we	

opened	a	new	APAC	office	in	Sydney,	

Australia	and	have	added	to	our	

operations	in	Cary,	US	and	Chennai,	India.

We	have	continued	to	invest	in	our	existing			

This	unique	real	time	capability,	along	with			

Global pandemic 

Celebrus	Customer	Data	Platform	(CDP)	

and	following	positive	market	soundings	

invested	in	the	development	of	the	

Celebrus	Fraud	Data	Platform	(FDP)	which	

has	been	launched	in	June	2021.

Our	geographic	expansion	has	continued,	

and	we	have	expanded	and	deepened	our	

partner	relationships	in	existing	and	different	

verticals.	I	am	very	pleased	with	the	

progress	made	and	can	confidently	confirm	

the	year	has	been	a	strong	one	for				D4t4,	

building	the	foundations	for	further	growth.

D4t4’s	financial	performance	in	the	year	

was	ahead	of	our	expectations,	reflecting	

the	strength	of	our	product	offering	and	

partner	relationships,	as	well	as	the	

fundamental	shift	of	businesses	online	

and	the	essential			part	we	play	in	that	

digital	transformation.	However,	the	global	

pandemic	situation	inevitably	forced	some	

customers	to	focus	on	internal	challenges,	

resulting	in	some	client	projects	and	new	

initiatives	being	paused	or	slowed.	This	

had	a	modest	impact	on	top	line	growth	

in	2020/21.

We	enter	the	new	financial	year	with	

positive	market	tailwinds	and	continue	to			

proactively	develop	our	product	offering	so	

global	digital	transformation	is	helping		us	

On	behalf	of	the	Board,	I	would	like	to	

to	drive	our	reach	into	new	sectors	and	

say	how	grateful	I	am	to	our	leadership	

verticals.	Customers	and	partners	are	

finding	that	our	capabilities	can	provide	

vital	functionality	beyond	our	traditional	

core	focus	of	financial	services	and	into	

the	retail,	automotive,	telecoms	and	

healthcare	sectors.

It	is	our	strong	partner	relationships	and	

customer-led	approach	that	have	driven	

our	innovation	in	R&D.	New	releases	of	

team	and	staff	across	the	world	for	their	

commitment	to	the	business	and	the	way				

they	have	responded	to	the	challenges	of				

the	pandemic.

Despite	having	to	close	our	offices	at	

short			notice,	our	staff	have	been	able	

to	work	from	home	with	little	interruption	

and	have	maintained	the	highest	levels	

Celebrus	CDP	have	provided	key	solutions	

of	customer	service.	Following	the	

for	clients	such	as	seamless	integration	

lockdowns	across	the	world,	the	Board	

with	other	software,	natural	language	

reviewed	the	impact	on	all	roles	across	

and	machine	learning	capabilities	and		

the	business.	Although	a	few	roles	were	

reductions	in	data	storage	costs.

Research	into	other	markets	where	real	

time,	highly	granular	client	interaction	
would	be	value	enhancing	has	led	us	

to	invest	in	a	new	fraud	detection	and	

identity	verification	tool.	This	product	has	

been	launched,	post	period	end.	Known	

as	Celebrus	FDP,	this	product	is	built	on	

the	foundations	of	the	Celebrus	CDP	and	

represents	a	completely	new	vertical	for	

not	required	during	the	office	closures,	

the	Group	did	not	use	taxpayer	funded	

furlough	schemes	in	any	geographies.

Whilst	we	are	a	technology	driven	

company,	we	are	also	a	people	led	

business	and	innovation	is	driven	from	

personal	interaction	across	the	firm	and	

with	customers,	so	we	look	forward	to	

returning	to	a	more	hybrid	working	model.		

us.	This	product	has	a	huge	addressable	

We	envisage	this	as	a	combination	of	

market	and	is	the	result	of	nearly	two	

home	and	office	working,	whilst	optimising	

years	of	design,	development	and	testing.

2

opportunities	for	creative	interaction,	

an	international	digital	media,	analytics	

before	tax	and	cash	generation	metrics,	

communication	and	efficient	working.

and	intelligence	business	will	be	of	great		

though	always	subject	to	the	constant	

benefit	to	D4t4	as	it	moves	into	the	next		

assessment	of	the	impact	of	the	global	

phase	of	its	development.

pandemic	on	the	Group.

Board changes

In	January	2021,	John	Lythall	announced	

his	intention	to	retire	as	a	Non-Executive			

Director	at	the	end	of	March	2021.		

Formerly	CEO	of	D4t4	until	he	stepped	

down	in	2016,	John	co-founded	the	

business	along	with	Peter	Kear	and	

has	been	instrumental	in	the	Group’s	

development.	We	wish	him	the	very	best				

for	his	retirement.

Additionally,	we	are	intending	to	create	a	

new	Group	Operations	Board	below	the	

main	D4t4	Board	which	will	consist	of	Jim	

Dodkins	(CTO),	Mark	Boxall	(COO)	and	a	

number	of	our	existing	senior	managers;	

accordingly,	Jim	and	Mark	both	stepped	

down	from	the	D4t4	Board	on	the	30th	

of	June	2021	to	lead	the	formation	of	the	

Group	Operations	Board.		This	will	enable	

In	February	2021,	Charles	Irvine,	CFO,	

them	to	focus	entirely	on	the	execution	

announced	his	decision	to	leave	the	Group	

and	delivery	of	Group	strategy.

to	pursue	another	opportunity	outside	

of	the	public	markets.	Charles	has	been	

replaced	by	interim	CFO	Nitil	Patel	and	the	

search	for	a	permanent	CFO	is	ongoing.

I	would	personally	like	to	take	this	

opportunity	to	thank	Jim	and	Mark	for	all	

their	hard	work	and	support	and	I	know	

that	they	will	ensure	the	success	of	the	

After	the	period	end,	in	April	2021,	Peter	

new	management	structure.

Outlook

Despite	the	obvious	challenges	of	the	

pandemic	the	business	has	continued	to	

thrive	over	the	last	year	as	evidenced	by	

our	financial	and	operational	performance,	

proving	that	our	robust	strategy	continues	

to	deliver.	Our	high	level	of	customer	

retention,	excellent	customer	references	

and	increasing	recurring	revenue	visibility		

position	the	Group	well.

We	enter	FY22	in	a	solid	financial	position,	

with	high	profit	margins,	a	strong	cash	

position	with	no	debt	and	a	well	proven	

business	model.		Trading	during	the	new	

financial	year	has	been	in	line	with	the	

Board’s	expectations	with	strong				levels	of	

Kear,	CEO,	announced	his	plans	to	retire	

by	June	2022.	Peter’s	energy,	leadership	

skills	and	strength	of	personality	have	

been	critical	to	the	success	of	D4t4	since	

he	co-founded	the	Group	back	in	1985	

and			became	CEO	in	2016.	On	behalf	

of	the	entire	Board,	I	would	like	to	thank	

Peter	for			all	his	contributions	to	the	

business	and	would	like	to	say	a	personal	

thank	you	for	the	professional	manner	in	

which	he	has	handled	the	process	and	

contributed	pro-	actively	to	the	search	for	

his	successor.

Following	an	extensive	search	process	

led	by	Monika	Biddulph,	Chair	of	the	

Nominations		Committee,	I	am	delighted	

that	Peter	will	be	replaced	by	Bill	Bruno,	

previously	Vice	President	of	D4t4’s	US	

business.	I	am	confident	that	following	

a	well-managed	handover	the	business	

will	continue	to	thrive	and	develop	a	host	
of	new	global	opportunities	under	Bill’s	

leadership.

This	gives	the	opportunity	to	streamline	

both	existing	and	new	client	activity.

the	main	D4t4	Board	to	allow	increased	

focus	on	corporate	governance,	group	

strategy	formulation	as	well	as	investor	

and	wider	stakeholder	relations.	From	

the	1st	of	July	2021	the	Board	of	D4t4	

will	consist	of	the	Chief	Executive	Officer,	

the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	two	Non-

Executive	Directors	and	(upon	making	

a	permanent	appointment)	the	Chief	

Financial	Officer.

Dividend

The	Board	is	excited	about	the	growth	

opportunity	represented	by	the	new	

FDP	product	and	has	now	launched	a	

comprehensive	program	to	market	the	

product	and	build	the	associated	team	to	

ensure	a	successful	global	launch	during	

FY22.	Whilst	FDP	is	only	expected	to	drive	

modest	initial	recurring	revenues	this	year	

customer	and	partner	interest	levels	are	

already	encouraging,	with	several	currently	

using	and	evaluating	the	technology.

Notwithstanding	the	global	pandemic,	the	

The	Board	remains	highly	confident	in	the	

Board	has	maintained	dividend	payments	

Group’s	strategy;	our	underlying	business	

during	FY21	reflecting	the	financial	strength	

is	delivering	against	our	key	KPI’s		and	

of	the	Group,	its	significant	liquidity	position	

performing	well,	and	D4t4	is	well	positioned	

and	the	Board’s	longer	term	confidence	in	

in	its	key	markets.	The	current	revenue	

the	performance	of	the	business.

visibility,	order	book	and	pipeline	of		

The	Board	recognises	the	importance	of	

returns	to	shareholders	so	we	are	delighted	

today	to	be	recommending	the	payment	

of	a	final	dividend,	subject	to	shareholder	

opportunities	all	bode	well	for	the	future.

Prior	to	joining	D4t4	in	2018,	Bill	was	

approval	at	the	2021	AGM,	of	2.0p	per	

CEO	of	Stratigent	between	2009-2013	

share	(2020:	1.9p).		The	final	dividend	is	

until	it	was	acquired	by	Ebiquity.	He	then	

expected	to	be	paid	on	17	September	2021	

served	as	Ebiquity’s	CEO	(North	America)	

to	shareholders	on	the	register	as	at	the	

until	2018.	Bill’s	wealth	of	industry	

close	of	business	on	13	August	2021.

Peter	Simmonds
Chairman

28 July 2021 

knowledge	and	excellent	track	record	in	

the	digital	data	market	and	in	growing	

The	Board	expects	to	maintain	a	dividend	

payment	in	line	with	adjusted	profit	

3

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportStatement by the Chief Executive Officer

This demand resulted in a healthy sales 

With	customers	extending	the	use	of	

pipeline,	with	new	contract	wins	in	

our	products	into	additional	territories,	

the	healthcare	and	telecoms	sectors	

our	software	is	now	used	in	27	countries	

broadening	our	customer	base	beyond	our	

around	the	globe.

Peter Kear

Chief Executive 

Officer

The	year	to	31	March	2021	was	one	
of	good	progress	for	D4t4,	despite	
the	impact	of	the	global	pandemic.	
After	a	slightly	slower	start	to	the	year	
while	customers	got	used	to	the	“new	
normal”	way	of	conducting	business	
remotely,	our	customers	accelerated	
their	efforts	to	affect	their	digital	
business	transformations,	with	an	
industry	report	(Dynatrace)	suggesting	
digital	transformation	accelerated	by	
89%	in	the	last	12	months,	with	further	
momentum	expected. 

The	Group	delivered	revenue	and	adjusted	

traditional	financial	and	consumer	markets.

Constantly	innovating,	we	have	continued	

to	invest	in	the	development	of	our	

products	and	were	proud	to	launch	both	

Celebrus	CDP	9.2	and	9.3	versions	during	

the	year.	These	included	newly	embedded	

machine	learning	and	natural	language	

processing	capabilities	as	well	as	cloud	

connectivity,	reducing	data	storage	costs	

for	clients.

This	drive	for	innovation	and	the	current	

emphasis	on	the	importance	of	identity,	

privacy	and	data	protection	has	led	to	the	

development	of	our	new	Celebrus	Fraud	

Data	Platform	(FDP)	which	was	launched	

post	period-end,	taking	D4t4	into	an	

exciting	new	area	of	fraud	prevention	and	

security,	along	with	its	associated	verticals.

Sales overview 

During	the	year,	we	saw	new	international	

sales	wins	from	customers	across	Europe,	

the	US,	Asia	and	the	Middle	East.

These	were	not	only	in	our	core	areas	of	

financial	services,	but	also	included	the	

automotive,	online	retail,	healthcare	and	

telecoms	sectors.	The	majority	of	these	

contracts	are	on	an	ARR	basis,	helping	to	

drive	our	ARR	transition.	Existing	clients	

were	also	key	customers	over	the	year,	

often	adding	geographical	expansions	and	

additional	capabilities	to	current	contracts.

Revenue	for	the	year	grew	by	4.6%	

to	£22.8	million	(2020:	£21.8	million)	

with	adjusted	profit	before	tax	of	£4.5	

million	(2020:	£5.0	million).		Sales	of	

our	Celebrus	product	family	of	software	

and	services	now	make	up	81%	of	total 	

profit	before	tax	of	£22.8	million	and	£4.5	

Strategy and position

million	respectively,	ahead	of	the	Board’s	

We	have	delivered	real	progress	on	our 	

company	revenue	(2020:	80%).	As	a	

prior	expectations	and	with	significant	

progress	on	our	strategy	of	migrating	

aim	to	transition	towards	a	predominantly	

result	of	the	improved	quality	of	revenues,	

ARR	model	which	has	had	a	positive 	

gross	margins	also	improved	to	62.4%	

towards	an	ARR	model.	ARR	increased	by	

impact	on	the	visibility	and	stability	of 	 

(2020:	60.7%).

11%	year	on	year	to	£10.6	million	(2020:	

our	revenue.	The	shift	is	being	driven	by 	

£9.55	million),	providing	more	revenue	

visibility	and	better	quality	earnings.	

new	product	innovations	and	uptake,	

although	the	pace	is	ultimately	driven	by 	

Statutory	profit	before	tax	was	£3.0	million	

customer	requirements.

which	was	in	line	with	expectations.

We	closed	the	year	with	£14.2	million	in	

cash	up	11%	on	last	year’s	£12.8	million,	

and	due	to	the	successful	fourth	quarter,	

we	ended	the	year	with	£10.2	million	in	

We	are	progressing	on	our	strategy	of	

debtors,	which	is	expected	to	unwind	by	

We	are	proud	to	have	achieved	this	

growing	product	revenues	within	our	

the	next	reporting	date.

without	any	assistance	from	government	

Celebrus	family	of	products.	This	has	

schemes,	with	no	staff	furloughed	and	

been	enabled	by	broadening	our	offering	

whilst	continuing	to	pay	all	relevant	taxes.

to	target	additional	verticals	such	as	

With	the	emphasis	on	businesses’	online	

offerings	growing	hugely	due	to	the	global	

pandemic,	we	saw	strong	demand	for	our	

Celebrus	family	of	products.	Being	able	to	

optimise	a	customer’s	online	experience	

and	harness	the	data	generated	in	real	

time	have	become	ever	more	important	

as	our	clients	seek	to	differentiate	

themselves	and	their	digital	offering	in	a	

crowded	marketplace.

healthcare,	retail,	telecoms,	automotive	

and	travel,	as	well	as	developing	

innovative	capabilities	in	new	versions	of	

our	Celebrus	CDP	software.

Global Reach

We	have	focused	on	international	

expansion	during	the	year,	establishing	

a	presence	in	APAC,	as	well	as	investing	

in	our	operations	in	the	US	and	India,	

which	will	all	be	key	drivers	going	forward.

As	we	invest	behind	our	newly	launched	

Celebrus	FDP	fraud	product,	we	expect	an	

increase	in	operating	expenditure	as	we	

recruit	specialists	in	this	new	sector	and	

increase	our	marketing	spend	for	our	new	

product	family.

Partnerships

Our	strategic	industry	partnerships	

continue	to	be	a	focus	for	future	growth	

and	providing	geographical	reach	and	

business	diversity	beyond	our	own	core	

verticals	and	territories.	During	the	year	

4

we	have	strengthened	relationships	

with	key	partners	including	Teradata,	

Pegasystems,	SAS	and	Dell,	working	

together	to	innovate	and	to	ensure	

seamless	product	integration.

This	resulted	in	the	development	and	

launch	of	a	joint	innovation	with	Teradata	

in	April	2020.	Celebrus	CDP’s	real	

time	capabilities	were	integrated	with	

Teradata’s	Vantage	CX	software,	enabling	

it	to	provide	customer	behaviour	data	

instantly	from	across	all	digital	channels	

to	create	personalised	and	optimised	

customer	experiences,	at	scale.

Post	period-end,	D4t4	also	launched	

a	key	joint	update	with	Pegasystems	

to	its	Pega	Customer	Profile	Designer	

platform,	integrating	Celebrus	CDP	

to	generate	complete,	compliant,	

individual-level	digital	behaviour	data,	

enabling	enterprises	to	create	relevant,	

contextualised	offers	and	messaging	in	

real-time,	for	every	customer.

Channel	partner	sales	contribute	a	major	

proportion	of	our	revenues,	so	working	

closely	with	our	partner	base	to	provide	

solutions	driven	by	customer	need	is	a	

priority.	Further	collaborations	with	our	

strategic	partners	are	underway	and	are	

expected	to	continue	to	provide	valuable	

product	innovations	and	updates	in	the	

short	to	medium	term.

Markets and opportunities

The	benefits	of	this	partner	focus	are 	

demonstrated	by	the	new	opportunities	

that	arise	-	we	are	being	introduced	to 	

different	user	groups	within	partners	and 	

customers	which	want	to	use	the	depth 	

and	quality	of	our	data	in	new	ways.	One 	

particular	area	has	been	in	risk	and	fraud, 	

which	has	driven	both	the	development	

of	our	new	Celebrus	FDP	software 	

and	the	requirement	for	new	strategic	

partnerships	to	exploit	the	use	of	our 	

software	and	data	in	those	areas.

“

D4t4 Solutions has been a great partner to Pega 
and our clients. Their data collection solutions 
are a valuable complement to Pega's decisioning 
solutions, and they have been central to our 
winning a number of strategic new business 
opportunities

HAYDEN STAFFORD
President Global Client Engagement
PEGASYSTEMS

“

We have a long-standing mutually beneficial 
partnership with D4t4 Solutions and their Celebrus 
product set, and together we have helped some 
of the world's largest banks, including three 
of the top ten retail banks, plus global airlines, 
telecommunications companies, healthcare 
providers, and insurers, generate significant 
incremental revenue and deliver outstanding 
Customer Experience for our joint clients

STEVE MCMILLAN
President and Chief Executive Officer
TERADATA

5
5

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportCustomer Data Platform (CDP)

Celebrus	CDP	uses	machine	learning	to	deliver	Automated	
Marketing	Signals.	These	enable	enterprises	to	better	
understand	customer	interest,	life	events,	subscriptions	
and	customer	experience	in	real	time.	These	preconfigured	
signals	reveal	new	revenue	generating	opportunities	and	
dramatically	limit	customer	churn.

Celebrus	CDP’s	new	natural	language	processing	
functionality	provides	enterprises	with	a	valuable	and	
immediate	insight	into	customer	sentiment	across	all	digital	
channels	including	online	chatbots,	complaints	feedback	
and	product	review	forums.	Speed	is	significant	because	
it	allows	clients	to	make	meaningful	interventions	‘in	the	
moment’	to	safeguard	customer	relationships	and	reinforce	
their	brand	values.

Our	solutions	give	our	customers	confidence	in	the	depth	
and	quality	of	their	data,	safe	in	the	knowledge	that	they	
can	collect	all	relevant	data	from	every	customer	interaction	
across	all	digital	channels	in	real	time.

The	launch	of	CDP	version	9.3	in	January	2021,	also	helps	
enterprises	to	substantially	reduce	their	storage	costs.	As	
more	and	more	customers	engage	with	businesses	through	
online	channels,	enterprises	are	seeing	a	huge	rise	in	data	
volumes.	Celebrus	CDP	now	includes	seamless	Cloud	
connectivity	which	significantly	reduces	data	storage	costs.

Customer Data Management (CDM)

Our	Celebrus	customer	data	management	(CDM)	
technology,	previously	known	as	Hybrid	Cloud,	ensures	
that	digital	channel	data	can	be	easily	combined	and	
managed	with	any	other	customer	data	that	exists	–	
thereby	enabling	customer	analytics,	optimised	customer	
experiences	and	more	accurate	targeted	marketing,	or	for	
risk	and	fraud	applications	all	in	real	time.

Our	data	migration,	data	management	and	data	monitoring	
software	is	used	in	many	organisations	where	combining	
and	managing	very	large	historical	data	sets	at	scale	is	the	
challenge.

We	recently	launched	a	new	product	in	this	area	which	
enables	the	detection	of	unintentional	mass	data	deletions.	
The	mass	deletion	alert	module	has	been	successfully	
deployed	with	one	major	global	banking	group	and	has	
proved	invaluable	to	them	immediately.

6
6

Notable wins for Celebrus CDP  
during the year included: 

	z A	new	business	win	with	a	European	b2b	 
	 	 e-commerce	provider
	z A	multi-year	contract	extension	with	an	existing 
			 global	automotive	manufacturing	customer
	z A	significant	contract	expansion	with	a	 
	 	 major	US	financial	services	organisation
	z An	extension	of	a	contract	with	a	major	UK	bank
	z A	new	business	win	with	a	top	five	Taiwanese		

insurance	provider

	z A	significant	multi-year,	fully	managed,	contract		
	 	 extension	with	an	existing	UK	top	five	online	 

retail	customer

	z A	new	multi-year	contract	with	a	top	five	middle		
	 	 eastern	telecommunications	company

CUSTOMER DATA PLATFORM

With	companies	continually	demanding	more	from	their	data	
our	CDM	software	offerings	are	in	greater	demand	than	ever	
before.

Notable wins for Celebrus CDM  
during the year included: 

	z A	significant	multi-year	contract	extension	with	a		
	 	 major	US	financial	services	organisation		
	z A	significant	multi-year,	fully	managed,	contract	 
	 	 extension	with	an	existing	UK	top	five	online	 

retail	customer	

CUSTOMER DATA MANAGEMENT

 
	 	
	 	
 
	 	
We	are	expanding	geographically	and	

are	working	to	develop	new	partner	

relationships	in	different	verticals.

As	demonstrated	by	the	number	of	

new	product	launches	alongside	digital	

transformation	tailwinds,	we	have	entered	

the	current	financial	year	with	strong	

momentum.	With	the	launch	of	our	new	

fraud	offering,	and	with	our	improved	

revenue	visibility,	order	book	and	pipeline,	

we	are	optimistic	about	the	year	ahead.

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer

28 July 2021

Technology platform leadership

New Board structure

The	evolution	of	our	Celebrus	CDP	

As	previously	announced,	I	will	be	retiring	

software	has	continued	during	the	year	

by	the	end	of	June	2022	with	Bill	Bruno	

and	we	are	proud	that	it	remains	the	

(currently	Deputy	CEO)	assuming	the	CEO	

leading	real	time,	multi-channel	digital	

role	in	due	course.		Bill	and	I	are	currently	

data	collection	platform,	used	by	many	of	

working	closely	together	to	ensure	an	

the	world’s	largest	financial	services	and	

orderly	transition	over	the	coming	months,	

consumer	organisations.

and	I	will	continue	to	support	him	after	the	

This	drive	for	excellence	and	innovation	

formal	handover	through	to	30	June	2022.

has	resulted	in	the	launch	of	our	

Additionally,	we	are	intending	to	create	a	

completely	new	capability,	the	Celebrus	

new	Group	Operations	Board	below	the	

Fraud	Data	Platform	(FDP).

main	D4t4	Board	which	will	consist	of	Jim	

Using	automated	behavioural	biometrics	

to	eliminate	fraud	around	the	three	core	

fraud	use	cases	of	Account	Opening,	

Account	Takeover	and	Payment	

Processing,	FDP	is	able	to	identify	

potentially	fraudulent	signals	in	real-time	

so	as	to	pre-empt	occurrence,	enabling	

enterprises	to	improve	their	fraud	

Dodkins	(CTO),	Mark	Boxall	(COO)	and	a	

number	of	our	existing	senior	managers;	

accordingly,	Jim	and	Mark	both	stepped	

down	from	the	D4t4	Board	on	the	30th	

of	June	2021	to	lead	the	formation	of	the	

Group	Operations	Board.		This	will	enable	

them	to	focus	entirely	on	the	execution	

and	delivery	of	Group	strategy.

management	processes,	avoid	losses,	

I	would	personally	like	to	take	this	

reduce	reputational	damage	and	help	with	

opportunity	to	thank	Jim	and	Mark	for	all	

identification	of	fraudsters	even	before	a	

their	hard	work	and	support	during	the	

fraud	has	taken	place.

last	six	years	while	I	have	been	CEO	and	I	

FDP	helps	businesses	protect	their	

customers	through:

	z Behavioural	biometrics	and	analytics		
	 which	provide	seamless	detail	about 

users	as	they	navigate	digital	channels;

	z Insights	that	signal	unusual	online		
interactions	in	real-time	to	identify		

fraud	across	the	customer	journey;
	z Integration	to	existing	fraud	detection		
and	investigation	systems	to	identify		

and	prevent	multiple	fraud	types;
	z Complete	control	to	quickly	adapt	to		

evolving	threats.

know	that	they	will	ensure	the	success	of	

the	new	management	structure.

This	gives	the	opportunity	to	streamline	

the	main	D4t4	Board	to	allow	increased	

focus	on	corporate	governance,	group	

strategy	formulation	as	well	as	investor	

and	wider	stakeholder	relations.	From	

the	1st	of	July	2021	the	Board	of	D4t4	

will	consist	of	the	Chief	Executive	Officer,	

the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	two	Non-

Executive	Directors	and	(upon	making	

a	permanent	appointment)	the	Chief	

Financial	Officer.

The	launch	will	incur	additional	

Looking forward

expenditure	in	the	current	financial	year	

as	the	new	product	will	be	supported	

by	a	new	specialist	fraud	team	which	

is	being	recruited	and	we	will	also	

be	supplementing	our	installed	base	

customer	success	team	with	a	number	of	

new	hires	around	the	globe.

D4t4	has	performed	well	during	a	

challenging	year.	Our	strategic	focus	

continues	to	pay	off	with	good	growth	

in	the	business	and	significant	progress	

in	the	transition	to	ARR.	We	continue	to	

lead	in	our	technology	segment,	through	

innovation	and	through	customer	and	

partner	led	development.

7

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report	
	
	
	
	
	
Chief Financial Officer Report

Annual	Recurring	Revenues	(ARR)	of	11.0%	

The	addition	of	new	staff	and	the	

Income statement

Revenue

The	Group	achieved	continuing	operations	

revenue	growth	of	4.6%	despite	the	

impact	of	the	global	pandemic	to	working	

practices.	Revenue	was	£22.8	million	

(2020:	£21.8	million).	The	quality	of	the	

revenue	growth	is	evidenced	by	increased	

to	£10.6	million	(2020:	£9.55	million).

The	Group	maintained	its	international	

growth	with	non-UK	revenues	accounting	

for	87%	of	the	total	revenue	for	the	year	

(2020:	81%).

As	the	Group	continues	the	migration	

to	ARR,	emphasis	on	CDP	and	CDM	

continues.	As	the	new	Celebrus	Fraud	Data	

Platform	(FDP)	product	gains	traction	we	

expect	it	to	achieve	the	same	prominence,	

especially	to	new	clients	and/or	partners.	

Sales	of	the	Celebrus	product	family	of	

software	and	services	now	make	up	81%	

of	total	Group	revenue	(2020:	80%).

Gross margin 

The	gross	margin	for	continuing	

operations	was	62.4%	(2020:	60.7%).	The	

increase	in	gross	margin	comes	from	the	

growth	in	revenue	from	CDP	sales.	The	

Group	continues	to	see	value	in	both	the	

direct	and	indirect	models	of	selling	and	

hence	will	continue	to	invest	in	building	

long	term	ARR.

Operating expenses 

Adjusted	operating	profit	before	tax	from	

continuing	operations	decreased	by	11.8%	

from	£5.1	million	to	£4.5	million.	Operating	

expenses	as	a	percentage	of	revenues	

moved	from	38%	to	49%.	The	main	cost	

categories	were	increased	employment	

costs,	share	based	payments	and	foreign	

exchange	expenses	in	the	year.

The	administration	expenses	increase	

relates	to	additional	staff,	salaries,	

bonuses	and	one-off	FDP	associated	

expenses	(£1.2	million),	foreign	exchange	

8

charge	in	the	year	(£0.7	million)	plus	a	

exchange	expense	and	tax	on	these	

comparative	year	on	year	movement	from	

adjustments	as	set	out	in	note	13	below.

a	foreign	exchange	credit	of	£0.4	million,	

share	based	payments	(£0.2	million),	

director	remuneration	(£0.2m)	and	other	

costs	(£0.2	million).	This	has	resulted	in	an	

increase	of	£2.9m	to	£11.2	million	for	the	

year	(2020:	£8.3	million).

retention,	motivation	and	reward	for	

success	of	our	existing	employees	are	

critical	for	the	Group	and	these	additional	

expenses	reflect	these	aims	and	the	

current	employment	environment.	This	

Dividend Policy 

The	Board	is	today	proposing	a	final	

dividend,	subject	to	shareholder	approval	

at	the	2021	AGM,	of	2.0p	per	share	(2020:	

1.9p).		The	final	dividend	is	expected	

to	be	paid	on	17	September	2021	to	

shareholders	on	the	register	as	at	the	

close	of	business	on	13	August	2021.

Financial Position

Intangibles 

and	the	additional	costs	associated	with	

Goodwill	of	£8.7	million	(2020:	£8.7	million)	

the	development	of	our	new	FDP	platform	

results	from	the	acquisition	of	Celebrus	

contributed	to	the	extra	administration	

(Speed-	Trap)	in	2015	with	the	net	balance	

expenses.	Further,	the	foreign	exchange	

of	£0.87	million	(2020:	£0.96	million)	of	

expense	is	a	consequence	of	the	rapid	

other	intangibles	representing	purchased	

appreciation	of	the	pound	against	dollar	

IPR,	trade	name	and	capitalised	

denominated	contracts,	which	the	Group	

development	costs.	The	Group	expenses	

will	look	to	manage	going	forward,	utilising	

the	majority	of	its	R&D	costs	and	

forward	foreign	exchange	contracts.	

capitalised	£0.2	million	in	the	year	(2020:	

Taxation 

£0.2	million).

Profitability	in	the	year	was	lower	than	

Right of use Assets 

last	year	and	as	a	consequence	the	tax	

The	Group	has	applied	IFRS	16	Leases	for	

liability	decreased	to	£0.3	million	(2020:	

the	year	commencing	1	April	2020	as	it	was	

£0.5	million).	With	an	effective	tax	rate	of	

immaterial	for	the	previous	financial	year.

9%,	the	Group	continues	to	utilise	R&D	

and	Patent	Box	tax	credits.	In	addition,	

the	Group	benefited	from	the	tax	impact	of	

share	options	being	exercised	in	the	year.		

Earnings per share 

Basic	EPS	for	the	year	was	6.88p	(2020:	

11.12p)	and	diluted	basic	EPS	was	

6.75p	(2020:	11.04p).	The	basic	figure	

has	been	calculated	using	the	weighted	

average	number	of	shares	in	issue	being	

40,235,856	(2020:	39,976,957)	and	the	

diluted	figure	using	41,007,252	(2020:	

40,276,951).

The	Group	has	applied	the	modified	

approach	from	1	April	2020	but	has	not	

restated	comparatives	for	the	year	ended	

31	March	2020	as	permitted	under	the	

specific	transitional	provisions	in	the	

standard.	The	net	asset	value	at	year	end	

was	£0.26	million	(2020:	£nil).

Cashflow and working capital 

The	Group	had	strong	cash	management	

in	the	year	with	net	cash	generated	from	

continuing	operations	of	£3.3	million	

(2020:	£2.4	million)	an	increase	of	37.5%.	

The	cash	balance	at	the	year	end	was	

Adjusted	basic	EPS	was	9.72p	(2020:	

£14.2	million	(2020:	£12.8	million).

11.28p)	and	adjusted	diluted	EPS	

was	9.52p	(2020:	11.19p)	following	

adjustments	for	amortisation,	share	based	

payments,	exceptional	items,	foreign	

The	Group	continues	to	be	debt	free	

and	maintains	a	robust	financial	position	

following	a	full	year	of	the	global	pandemic	

and	with	no	recourse	to	any	government	

support	schemes.	Financing	activities	

increased	in	the	year	from	£0.2	million	

to	£1.7	million	reflecting	cash	outflow	on	

dividends	paid	and	net	purchase	of	own	

shares	in	the	year.

Trade	receivables	have	grown	by	27.5%	

in	the	year	to	£10.2	million	(2020:	£8.0	

million),	reflecting	revenue	growth	and	

timing	differences	at	year	end	in	relation	to	

an	outstanding	debt	received	after	the	year	

end.	Overall	receivables	have	grown	31.9%	

due	to	the	increases	mentioned	earlier	and	

accrued	income	of	£2.6	million	(2020:	£1.5	

million).	Inventories	fell	significantly	to	£0.1	

million	(2020:	£1.3	million)	as	the	Group	

delivered	goods	before	the	year	end.

Trade	payables	and	accruals	decreased	in	

the	year	to	£4.1	million	(2020:	£4.8	million)	

as	the	Group	continues	to	pay	its	suppliers	

on	due	dates.	Deferred	income	increased	

significantly	by	53.6%	to	£6.3	million	(2020:	

£4.1	million)	reflecting	growth	in	ARR.

Purchase of own shares  

During	the	year,	the	Group	increased	

shares	held	in	Treasury	to	191,498	 

(2020:	159,133).	

Equity

The	principal	increase	in	the	year	was	

retained	earnings	growing	by	£1.7	million	

to	£20	million	(2020:	£18.3	million).	As	

at	31	March	2021	the	Group	had	£30.9	

million	(2020:	£29.3	million)	attributable	to	

the	shareholders	of	the	company.

Total Assets 

The	Group	ended	the	year	with	total	

assets	of	£41.9	million	(2020:	£38.9	

million)	an	increase	of	£3	million. 

Nitil	Patel
Interim Chief Financial Officer
28 July 2021

“

D4t4 has performed strongly during the year, 
despite the difficult circumstances, growing 
revenues by 4.6% whilst also making significant 
progress in the transition to more visible and 
better quality earnings, with our key ARR metric 
advancing 11% in the year. 

Throughout FY21 we have continued to 
innovate; the recent addition of the Fraud Data 
Platform to the Celebrus product family provides 
access to a growing $18 billion risk and fraud 
market and demonstrates the strength of our 
creative and technical talent. We have also 
grown geographically, deepened our existing 
relationships with strategic partners and developed 
a robust pipeline of new business as demand for 
enterprises' digital transformation increases. 

We have entered the new financial year in a strong 
position after a record second half and are well 
positioned for continued delivery in the year ahead.

PETER KEAR
Chief Executive Officer
D4t4 Solutions plc

9
9

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportKey Performance Indicators

Revenue

4.6%

2021

2020

Gross profit margin

2.6%

2021

2020

£22.8m

£21.8m

62.4%

60.8%

Revenue	from	sales	made	to	all	customers	
(excluding	intra-group	sales	which	are	eliminated	
on	consolidation).	Reflecting	transition	to	recurring	
revenue	business	model

Gross	profit	(being	less	all	direct	third-party	cost	of	
sales)	as	a	percentage	of	revenue

Adjusted profit before tax

Adjusted diluted EPS

£4.5m

2021

2020

9.5p

2021

2020

£4.5m

£5.1m

9.5p

11.2p

Profit	before	amortisation	of	intangibles,	share	based	
payment	charges,	foreign	exchange	gain/(loss)	and	
restructuring	costs

Gross	profit	(being	less	all	direct	third-party	cost	of	
sales)	as	a	percentage	of	revenue

10

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cash and equivalents

10.9%

2021

2020

ARR

11.0%

£14.2m

£12.8m

2021

2020

£10.6m

£9.6m

Strong	cash	position	with	no	external	borrowings	
allowing	for	further	strategic	investment	

ARR	expected	to	continue	to	grow

Total assets

7.7%

2021

2020

Net cash generated from  
operations consolidated

37.5%

£41.9m

£38.9m

2021

2020

£3.3m

£2.4m

Strong	financial	position	with	no	external	borrowings

Continued	net	cash	generation	from	operations	
strengthens	the	Group’s	overall	financial	position	

11

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Customer centricity  
in a post-pandemic economy

2020 was a year of global transformation, and one 
of the major changes accelerated by the global 
pandemic was digital transformation.

At	the	core	of	this	transformation	is	anticipating	the	customer	need	in	a	 

digital-first	world.	Many	organisations	were	forced	to	adapt	to	the	new	

normal	of	digital	interaction	as	the	primary,	and	in	many	cases	only,	

interaction	with	an	individual	consumer.	

The	complexity	of	the	digital	landscape,	combined	with	this	acceleration,	

also	led	to	many	new	approaches	to	protecting	the	consumer	and	the	

data	created	and	captured	about	them.	Following	in	the	footsteps	of	

GDPR,	D4t4	continues	to	see	enhanced	legislation	around	the	globe	

as	well	as	at	state-level	in	the	United	States.	In	addition,	web	browsers	

and	technology	organisations	continue	to	crack	down	on	third-party	

solutions	that	exist	outside	of	the	corporate	firewall.	

While	consumers	demand	a	personalised	experience,	and	expect	brands	

to	anticipate	their	needs,	they	also	expect	that	their	data	will	be	used	in	a	

100%	compliant	manner.	This	presents	an	additional	challenge	to	brands	

who	are	attempting	to	move	at	the	speed	of	light	with	data	but	need	to	have	

the	confidence	that	the	data	being	acted	on	is	both	ethical	and	compliant.

This	consumer	demand,	however,	must	be	fulfilled	instantly	as	the	 

patience	for	slower	or	less	personalised	experiences	across	both	channel	

and	device	is	waning.	To	deliver	that,	organisations	need	to	be	able	to	

scale	and	respond	in	milliseconds,	not	minutes.	However,	there	are	often	a	

whole	raft	of	challenges	when	it	comes	to	executing	at	this	scale.	

89%

of	CIOs	say	
their	digital	
transformation	has	
accelerated in the 
last	12	months

58%

of	CIOs	say	their	
digital	transformation	
will	continue	to	
speed	up

Source: Dynatrace 2020 CIO Study

Enterprises lack the automation they need to execute at scale

“Do	you	agree	with	the	following	statement”

Anticipate need
Don’t anticipate needs

Base: 260 digital business executives

We	automatically	update	all	the	data	 

in	our	custom	profiles	in	real	time

9%

33%

“Which,	if	any,	of	the	following	technology	challenges	does	your	firm	face	in	implementing	your	full	vision	for	
notifications	or	mobile	messaging.	Select	all	that	apply.”

Anticipate need
Don’t anticipate needs

We	don’t	have	enough	automation 

-	everything	is	manual	today

We	don’t	have	the	back-end	automation	we	need	to	act	upon	 

consumer	responses	(e.g.	confirming	an	appointment)

Our	data	ecosystem	and	ETL	processes	don’t	provide	timely	 

enough	data	to	deliver	relevant	real-time	experiences

22%

20%

18%

51%

48%

38%

We	don’t	have	any	technology	challenges	related	to	 

implementing	our	full	vision	for	mobile	messaging

1%

14%

Source: “Anticipatory Experiences: The Challenges” by Julie Ask January 20, 2021 (Forrester) 

12

The core opportunity for D4t4 

There	are	four	core	themes	arising	as	key	opportunities	for	growth	which	align	with	D4t4’s	differentiators	in	the	
marketplace	as	well	as	with	its	innovation	focus:

Identity

Privacy	&	
Compliance

Activation

Fraud

Identity

Customer-centricity	requires	organisations	to	identify	who	someone	is	as	they	traverse	the	journey	from	anonymous	to	known	and	

everything	in	between,	across	both	channel	and	device.	To	be	truly	real-time,	this	identity	must	exist	in	the	moment	and	must	be	able	

to	be	stitched	together	instantly	without	any	delay	as	new	information	presents	itself.	The	concept	of	an	Identity	Graph	is	paramount	

to	this	discussion	and	is	a	core	feature	of	the	latest	Celebrus	CDP	version	9.4,	launched	post-period	end	in	May	2021.	Without	identity	

management,	the	impact	of	digital	transformation	for	a	business	can	be	severely	limited.	

Recent	industry	developments,	such	as	Apple’s	Intelligent	Tracking	Prevention	(ITP)	and	app-level	privacy	enforcement	as	well	as	browser	

changes	and	the	blocking	of	third-party	cookies	continue	to	make	identity	a	key	issue.		It	is	particularly	problematic	for	traditional	tag-based	

data	capture	platforms	as	well	as	“assembly”	CDPs	who	rely	on	those	solutions	to	manage	customer	identity	for	them	before	the	data	lands	in	

their	systems.

This	presents	an	opportunity	for	Celebrus	CDP	as	it	is	truly	first	party	and	is	not	impacted	by	the	industry	changes	in	any	way.		Celebrus	CDP	

can	quickly	and	securely	identify	a	customer,	in	a	completely	compliant	way,	leveraging	its	industry-first	true	first	party	identity	graph,	which	is	

owned	and	controlled	internally	by	the	Group’s	client	within	its	deployment.

Identity

Marketing attribution

Visitor retargeting

Offers

Consent & Compliance

Decisioning

Fraud detection

Cross-device analytics

Channel Orchestration

Identity graphs

CX

Audience segments

Machine learning models

Marketing mix models

© D4t4 Solutions plc

A/B or multivariate tests

13

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report 
Privacy & Compliance

The	core	of	D4t4’s	Celebrus	product	offerings	is	compliance.	D4t4	is	referred	to	by	many	customers,	including	Chief	Privacy	Officers,	as	the	

first	data	solution	company	to	lead	with	privacy	&	compliance	at	the	forefront	of	its	platforms.	

D4t4’s	offerings	exist	behind	the	firewall	in	a	true,	first	party	manner,	which	not	only	ensures	that	its	customers	fully	own	and	control	any	

and	all	data	captured	about	consumers	but	also	that	its	systems	are	able	to	bring	this	information	together	in	a	meaningful,	instant	manner	

from	other	first	party	systems	of	record.	

In	addition,	D4t4	provides	Celebrus	Control	as	a	module	that	ultimately	ensures	that	any	of	its	data	capture	capabilities	in	the	marketplace	

today	adhere	to	the	preferences	of	a	consumer	with	regards	to	opt-in	and	opt-out.	

Compliance
1st Party data control

Apps

Web

Internet of Things

Subset of data

3rd Party 
Solutions

External 3rd party

Internal 1st party

Full data model

Data Warehouse (Single 
Source of Truth)

Subset of data

Other 1st Party Systems

Celebrus Data Model

Profiles

© D4t4 Solutions plc

14
14

Activation

Forrester	refers	to	creating	“Moments”	for	a	consumer	as	the	basis	of	“table	stakes”	in	today’s	economy.

These	moments	need	to	be	focused	on	the	individual	(e.g.,	1:1	personalisation)	and	should	be	predictive	in	nature	as	a	result	of	prior	and	

current	context	about	that	individual	and	the	full	history	of	all	interactions	and	profile	data	available.	

Engagement 
breadth

Moments

Context

Cross-channel

• Individual

• Real time

• Predictive

• Microtargeting

• Triggered

• Reactive

• Segments

• Campaigns

• Outbound

Engagement granularity

Source: Forrester ‘Future of Enterprise Marketing Technology

To	do	that,	the	definition	of	“real	time”	comes	to	the	forefront.	For	many	of	the	other	CDPs	and	traditional	data	capture	solutions	available,	

real	time	means	minutes	or	hours.	For	Celebrus	this	is	milliseconds.	

The	bedrock	of	creating	these	moments	and	surfacing	the	contextual	data	about	an	individual	is	the	core	Machine	Learning	(ML)	and	

Natural	Language	Processing	(NLP)	capabilities	built	into	Celebrus	products	that	can	identify	a	customer’s	intent	via	modules	such	as	

Automated	Marketing	Signals.	

D4t4’s	industry-leading	partners	in	the	decisioning	and	personalisation	sector	(including	Pegasystems,	Teradata,	SAS,	Adobe)	benefit 	

from	having	Celebrus	data	available	to	deliver	upon	these	moments	for	customers.	Continued	global	growth	with	these	partners	is	key	to 	

mutual	success.

15
15

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportFraud

Whilst	Celebrus	has	traditionally	been	focused	on	business	and	marketing	use,	many	customers	have	found	ways	to	use	its	platform 	

data	to	identify	fraudulent	activity.	Furthermore,	Celebrus	CDM	has	focused	on	building	risk	and	regulatory	environments	for	Financial 	

Institutions	for	many	years.	

New	research	from	the	Ponemon	Institute	and	sponsored	by	PayPal	looks	to	understand	the	current	fraud	landscape,	
barriers	and	challenges	organisations	face	in	mitigating	the	risk	of	online	fraud	and	the	resulting	financial	losses.

The Real Cost of Online Fraud

$4.5
million

51%

11%
decline

81%

The average amount 
organisations are losing per 
year due to online  
fraudulent transactions

Say their organisations are 
prioritising protecting online 
financial transactions

In effectiveness in reducing 
online fraud due to COVID-19 
(45% to 34%)

Say their organisations are 
more vulnerable as a result of 
digital transformation

This research was conducted by the Ponemon Institute and commissioned by PayPal. It examines 
survey data from 632 individuals from December 22, 2020 to January 8, 2021.

With	the	above	in	mind,	D4t4	has	identified	a	market	opportunity	to	launch	a	new	platform	within	the	Celebrus	portfolio:	 Celebrus Fraud 

Data Platform (FDP).	

The	new	digital-first	economy,	combined	with	the	enhanced	sophistication	of	fraudsters,	has	put	organisations	in	need	of	identifying	the	

fraudster	before	the	fraud.	Celebrus	FDP	is	focused	upon	providing	instant,	contextualised	data	for	the	purposes	of	doing	just	that.	This	is	a	

completely	new	market	opportunity	for	D4t4	and	the	Group	will	continue	to	invest	in	the	growth	of	this	new	revenue	stream	with	a	clear	set	

of	differentiators	and	a	battle-tested	platform	that	is	market	ready	today.	

16
16

Industry Sectors

In	the	past	year,	D4t4	has	seen	new	wins	in	both	the	US	Healthcare	market	and	the	global	Telecoms	market.	The	Group’s	core	focus	

remains	the	Financial	Services	and	Insurance	sectors,	but	also	with	enterprise	customers	across	these	new	verticals	as	well	as	Travel	&	

Hospitality	and	Retail.	

The	customer-centricity	desire,	and	the	expedited	digital	transformation	investments,	are	prevalent	in	every	vertical.	While	the	Group	

continues	to	expand	its	core	base	in	the	Financial	Services	industry,	it	will	continue	to	market	its	platform	more	broadly	with	focused,	use-

case	driven	solutions	built	upon	its	Celebrus	portfolio	of	products.

Geographic Focus

D4t4	can	provide	24/7	support	for	its	customers,	partners	and	end	users	due	to	its	geographical	presence	and	its	talented	staff.	The	Group	

continues	to	identify	opportunities	in	each	market	while	also	ensuring	it	balances	the	right	breakdown	of	skills	and	capabilities	to	respond	

to	key	industry	trends.	

The	Group’s	largest	growth	market	continues	to	be	the	US,	but	it	also	expects	to	create	new	global	revenue	streams	with	the	launch	of	

Celebrus	FDP.	With	the	opening	of	its	new	office	in	Sydney,	Australia,	D4t4	is	investing	in	exploring	the	APAC	market	as	well	as	ensuring	it	

continues	to	review	opportunities	across	Europe	and	South	America.	

17
17

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportVision and strategy

01
Mission 

02
Vision 

03
Strategy 

To	be	on	the	forefront	of	powering	
digital	transformation	and	fulfil	the	
marketplace	need	for	customer-
centricity	in	a	real-time,	fully	
compliant	manner.	

D4t4’s	Celebrus	CDM,	CDP,	and	FDP	
products	are	uniquely	positioned	to	
make	this	mission	a	reality	in	how	the	
Group	engages	and	deploys	across	
its	customer	base.

To	continually	innovate	and	build	a	
steadily	growing	business	that	earns	
high	margins	and	recurring	revenues	
by	partnering	with	clients	to	drive	
maturity	in	their	usage	of	data	along	
their	transformative	journey.		

D4t4	intends	to	lead	on	digital	
disruption	by	powering	artificial	
intelligence,	machine	learning,	
advanced	analytics,	compliance,	
fraud,	risk,	marketing,	and	customer	
experience	with	the	Group’s	CDM,	
CDP,	and	FDP	products.	

To	deliver	the	vision,	D4t4’s	strategy	
is	to	continue	to	focus	its	activity	on	
three	complimentary	areas	for	growth:

i.  Increasing	ARR	(Annual	Recurring		
	 Revenues)	derived	from	Celebrus		
	 CDP	by	leveraging	recent 

innovations	in	Identity,	Compliance		

	 and	Activation	to	deliver	the	most	 
	 high-value	solutions	for	customers.
ii.  To	launch	and	grow	ARR	for	our	 
	 new	Celebrus	FDP	in	the	fraud	 
	 sector	and	build	strategic	 
	 partnerships	that	can	perform	 
	 efficiently	and	better	as	a	result	 
	 of	our	instant,	contextualised	data, 
	 combined	with	machine	learning	 
	 and	artificial	intelligence.
iii. Generating	recurring	income		

through	developing,	deploying,		

	 and	managing	hybrid	cloud		
	 platforms	that	combine	the 

intellectual	property,	services,		
	 software,	and	hardware	needed		
to	help	clients	evolve	their	digital	 
transformation.		Continue	to	offer		
the	flexibility	and	scalability	of	 
	 D4t4’s	environments	to	support	a		
	 hybrid	cloud	or	multi	cloud	 
	 approach.	

18
18

 
 
 
		
	
		
	
	
	
04
Tactics 

05
Core offerings 

This	strategy	will	be	executed	
by	continuing	to	live	the	Group’s	
core	values	of	innovation,	trust,	
collaboration,	and	security.		

D4t4	will	continue	to	enhance	and	
grow	capabilities	across	the	three	
main	pillars	of	the	business:		CDM,	
CDP,	and	FDP.	

The	Group	has	depth	of	expertise	
and	wide	connections	within	the	
financial	services	and	consumer	
sectors,	and	will	continue	to	further	
apply	its	learnings	to	other	verticals	
and	partnerships	as	it	strategically	
grows	its		business	around	the	globe.	
and	hardware	needed	to	help	clients	
evolve	their	digital	transformation.		
Continue	to	offer	the	flexibility	and	
scalability	of	D4t4’s	environments	to	
support	a	hybrid	cloud	or	multi	cloud	
approach.	

To	be	the	best	at	capturing,	unifying,	and	activating	Customer	Data,	we	created	
the	Celebrus	Suite	of	products.

Our	Celebrus	Suite	provides	data-driven	businesses	with	a	competitive	
advantage	that	allows	them	to	unlock	the	right	data	at	the	right	time	and	to	
activate	it	to	make	smarter	business	decisions.

The suite comprises:

CUSTOMER DATA PLATFORM

Allowing	businesses	to	connect	instantly	with	their	customers,	as	if	
they	are	face-to-face	in	real-time.

FRAUD DATA PLATFORM

Allowing	businesses	to	protect	their	customers	from	online	fraud	and	
financial	crimes	in	real-time.

CUSTOMER DATA MANAGEMENT

Allowing	businesses	to	turn	their	raw	data	into	actionable	insights	
with	automated	ingestion,	integration,	transformation	and	delivery.

1919

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report 
 
TOXBASE - The UK National Poisons Information Service

A customer success story

Everyday	thousands	of	people	around	the	world	present	to	medical	specialists	seeking	urgent	help	
following	exposure	to	a	chemical	or	a	drug.		Whether	this	is	because	of	an	accident,	deliberate	misuse	
of	a	drug	or	substance	abuse	in	the	context	of	self-harm,	speed	of	response	is	of	the	essence	and	
determines	outcomes.	Medical	teams	need	instant	access	to	high	quality,	evidence-based	and	up	
to	date	information	about	the	many	thousands	of	different	substances	that	might	be	involved,	the	
potential	side	effects	of	exposure	and	the	appropriate	remedial	action	to	be	taken	by	clinical	teams. 

The Challenge

between	the	medical	and	IT	worlds	is	

Celebrus CDP

The	National	Poisons	Information	Service	

a	success	story	both	organisations	are	

In	2012	NPIS	were	looking	for	a	reliable	

(NPIS)	saw	an	opportunity	to	leverage	

rightfully	proud	of.	Ms	Lindsay	Gordon,	

way	to	see	specific	types	of	accesses	to	

new	technologies	to	improve	access	to	

Knowledge	&	Information	Manager	at	

the	TOXBASE	platform	in	real-time.	The	

their	service,	for	all	their	UK	NHS	users.	

NPIS,	remarked	that	“We	have	always	

Celebrus	Customer	Data	Platform	(formerly	

They	wanted	to	create	a	solution	that	

valued	D4t4’s	knowledge,	flexibility	and	

known	as	Speedtrap)	was	deployed	to	

was	instantly	and	equally	accessible	to	all	

approachability.		As	an	organisation	of	

handle	their	digital	data	capture	on	the	

healthcare	professionals	at	the	point	of	care	

medics	and	scientists	with	limited	IT	

web.	The	Celebrus	Customer	Data	Platform	

24hours	a	day,	7	days	a	week	and	365	days	

expertise,	we	love	the	empathy	and	care	

(CDP)	now	provides	them	with	insight	into	

a	year,	regardless	of	their	location.

shown	by	the	D4t4	team	who	always	make	

both	aggregated	usage	data	and	individual	

Enter	TOXBASE.	In	1999,	NPIS	Edinburgh	

(formerly	known	as	the	Scottish	Poisons	

Information	Bureau)	set	about	solving	

this	challenge	and	commissioned	D4t4	

Solutions	plc	D4t4	are	data	solutions	

experts	with	a	strong	reputation	for	

creating	innovative	data	platforms	and	

these	IT	related	matters	easy	for	us	to	

user	journey	data	in	real	time.	It	is	envisaged	

understand	and	manage.	And	importantly	

that	the	Celebrus	CDP	will	also	be	deployed	

they	have	innovated	and	reliably	maintained	

on	the	mobile	app	to	give	a	complete	

the	platform	for	us	ensuring	the	highest	

picture	of	all	their	users	which	will	enable	

customer	satisfaction	levels”.	

Web and Mobile App

deeper	understanding	and	optimisation	of	

the	user	experience	provided	over	time.

Use Cases and Outcomes

secure	solutions	for	an	impressive	range	

The	TOXBASE	solution	is	available	online	

of	global	clients	spanning	26	countries.		

via	web,	with	hospital	departments	being	

While	the	major	workload	of	the	NPIS	is	to	

D4t4	designed,	tested	and	in	1999	together	

the	top	users	of	the	service	accounting	

advise	hospital	emergency	departments,	

with	NPIS	led	the	launch	of	migrating	

for	more	60	%	of	TOXBASE	accesses;	

NHS	telephone	advice	services	and	primary	

the	TOXBASE	solution	to	the	Internet	to	

and	via	a	convenient	mobile	app	where	

care	services	when	accidental	or	intentional	

expand	its	availability	for	users	and	improve	

paramedics	and	emergency	departments	

poisonings	occur,	real	time	data	insights	can	

speed	of	access	to	vital	information.	It	has	

account	for	>65%	of	their	subscribers.

deliver	value	for	other	use	cases.	

no	fewer	than	17,000	+	individual	entries	

which	are	systematically	peer	reviewed	and	

meticulously	maintained,	and	over	2	million	

individual	page	accesses	a	year.	

In	December	2019,	D4t4	undertook	a	

For	example,	it	can	uncover	trends	in	

significant	redesign	of	the	app	to	improve	

exposures	in	a	region	which	can	give	early	

usability	and	to	create	a	more	seamless	

warning	of	an	impending	public	health	issue	

user	experience	for	web	and	app	users.	

enabling	both	public	health	authorities	and	

The	app	is	available	for	both	iOS	and	 

law	enforcement	to	make	early	interventions	

The Solution

been	Android.	

D4t4	Solutions	designed	and	built	the	data	

platform	for	the	National	Poisons	Information	

Service	and	has	been	responsible	for	

the	support,	maintenance	and	hosting	of	

this	clinical	toxicology	database	for	more	

than	30	years	without	interruption.		They	

have	become	the	trusted	outsourced	IT	

department	of	NPIS	underpinning	the	

production	and	delivery	of	the	TOXBASE	

platform.		This	collaboration	of	disciplines	

20

Access	to	TOXBASE	remains	free	to	UK	

NHS	staff	but	can	also	be	purchased	by	

other	interested	healthcare	professionals,	

private	healthcare	providers	and	

international	poisons	centres.		The	

to	preserve	life	and	valuable	resources.	

(A	monograph	is	a	predetermined	page	

providing	data	on	active	ingredients,	doses,	

formulations,	toxicity,	expected	features	in	

poisoning,	and	management	advice.)	

Having	a	real	time	alerting	system	allows	

availability	of	the	mobile	app	has	enabled	

NPIS	to	see	user	accesses	to	specific	

this	valuable	platform	to	be	more	widely	

monographs	and	can	alert	them	to	serious	

used	by	toxicologists,	clinicians,	and	front-

poisonings	and	incidents.			They	are	then	

line	medical	teams	the	world	over.	So	far	it	

able	to	contact	users	to	offer	additional	

has	been	deployed	in	>95	countries.	

At a glance

1980s
Expert resource launched
1999
Application	taken	online
2015
Mobile App launched

TOXBASE is a wholly 
owned and managed 
solution of  
The UK National 
Poisons Information 
Service

Over
7,000
UK Health 
Departments 
supported

Approaching
20,000
UK and International 
TOXBASE Mobile App 
subscribers

225,000
Mobile App accesses  

(+47.4% increase 2019-20)

>2m
page views from

686,000 user sessions  

(www.toxbase.org)

More than
17,000
unique substance

entries held on

TOXBASE

Circa
 40,000
telephone enquiries  

(down 5.6% 2019-20)

Available in
>95
countries and growing

“

We	are	fortunate	to	have	enjoyed	decades	of	
reliable	service	from	D4t4.	We	look	forward	to	
continuing	to	innovate	and	expand	the	access	 
to	TOXBASE	with	their	support

Dr GILL JACKSON
Information Services Manager
TOXBASE

“

Being	their	partner	of	choice	to	deliver	this	
critical	healthcare	resource	which	is	responsible	
for	saving	lives	is	something	that	I	am	immensely	
proud	of	and	we	look	forward	to	continuing	and	
deepening	our	partnership

PETER KEAR
Chief Executive Officer
D4t4 Solutions plc

21
21

expert	advice	during	management	of	their	

patients	which	can	significantly	improve	

patient	outcome.	

D4t4 Value

There	is	a	very	close	working	partnership	

between	the	team	at	NPIS	and	D4t4	

Solutions	which	has	endured	and	thrived	 

for	over	30	years.	Dr	Gill	Jackson,	

Information	Services	Manager	commented	

“NPIS	have	no	IT	qualified	staff	or	

infrastructure	in-house,	and	we	rely	on	

D4t4’s	support,	technical	expertise	and	

guidance	to	run	our	TOXBASE	platform,	

which	is	a	critical	healthcare	resource	

and	front-line	NHS	service.	Therefore,	it	is	

crucial	for	us	to	work	with	a	partner	who	

can	guarantee,	24/7	availability	of	our	

platform,	immediate	response	to	contacts	

and	adherence	to	the	highest	security	

standards	as	lives	are	at	stake.	We	are	

fortunate	to	have	enjoyed	decades	of	

reliable	service	from	D4t4.	We	look	forward	

to	continuing	to	innovate	and	expand	the	

access	to	TOXBASE	with	their	support”.	

Peter	Kear,	CEO	and	co-founder	of	D4t4	

Solutions	said	“Working	with	the	talented	

team	at	NPIS	to	create	the	TOXBASE	

solution	has	been	a	privilege	for	our	

team.		Their	trust	in	D4t4’s	expertise	

and	willingness	to	innovate	how	they	

democratise	access	to	vital	poisons	

information	and	treatment	information	is	

hugely	motivating.	Being	their	partner	of	

choice	to	deliver	this	critical	healthcare	

resource	which	is	responsible	for	saving	

lives	is	something	that	I	am	immensely	

proud	of	and	we	look	forward	to	continuing	

and	deepening	our	partnership”

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportTactical plans to manage challenges

Like	most	technology	and	innovation	companies,	D4t4	has	several	inherent	challenges	that	it	must	overcome	in	order	
to	execute	its	strategy	successfully.	The	table	below	sets	out	some	of	the	tactics	and	actions	taken	to	ensure	the	Group	
continues	to	deliver	successful	outcomes	for	its	stakeholders.

1.	Addressing	the	global	pandemic	impact	

The	global	pandemic	has	had	a	major	impact	on	many	

businesses	across	the	world.	The	way	in	which	D4t4	does	

business	is	constantly	changing	and	as	a	result	of	the	 

pandemic,	some	of	these	changes	will	be	felt	for	a	long	

Management	actions
	z All	staff	set-up	for	home-working	and	able	to	fulfil	 
	 duties	remotely
	z Board	meetings	and	weekly	Executive	meetings	held	via	 

time.		Whilst	the	market	in	which	D4t4	operates	should	not	be	

video	conference	

overly	impacted	in	the	long	term,	there	are	clearly	challenges	

	z Stress-testing	of	forecast	scenarios	to	confirm	no	cashflow	issues

nonetheless,	least	of	all	a	reluctance	on	the	part	of	some	

businesses	to	commit	to	large	investment	plans	in	the	current	

environment.		Similarly,	ensuring	the	health	and	safety	of	all	the	

Group’s	staff	and	that	products	are	able	to	function	for	all	 

clients	at	a	time	when	many	offices	are	closed	and	travel	

restrictions	remain	in	place,	is	a	priority.

	z Working	with	our	Partners	and	end-user	clients	to	ensure	no		

interruption	to	service	levels

	z Continued	focus	on	sales	pipeline,	supported	by	ability	to		
	 offer	variety	of	contracts	to	suit	e.g.	SaaS,	PaaS,	term	or	 

	 perpetual	licences

2.	Creating	the	right	products

Development	resources	are	allocated	based	upon	financial	

performance	targets	and	consequently	management	prioritises	

Management	actions
	z Frequent	client	and	partner	engagement	to	understand	 

product	development	carefully.	The	challenge	is	to	understand	the	

evolving	requirements

market	and	make	the	right	investment	decisions	which	will	deliver	a	

	z Interaction	with	industry	analysts	to	understand	current	and	 

return	on	investment	for	all	stakeholders	as	well	as	add	value	to	 

future trends

D4t4’s	clients.

3.	Sales	cycle	management

The	sales	cycle	for	D4t4’s	products	and	services	is	generally	

greater	than	one	year	due	to	the	cutting-edge	nature	of	the	

Group’s	products.	Also,	there	are	multiple	stakeholders	within	

the	client	that	have	to	be	addressed	and	due	to	the	size	of	

projects,	internal	budgets	have	to	be	planned	far	in	advance.		

The	challenge	is	to	manage	the	sales	pipeline	so	that	investor	

expectations	for	steady,	predictable	growth	can	be	met.

22

	z Attendance	at	industry	events	and	seminars	to	widen	knowledge
	z Growing	the	development	team,	especially	in	areas	such	as		
	 mobile	and	AI
	z Structured	product	planning	meetings	involving	all	stakeholders
	z Exploration	of	Client	Advisory	Boards	to	generate	more	input	 
from	the	Group’s	install	base	for	its	Product	Planning	team

Management actions
	z Fortnightly	sales	reviews
	z Monthly	Board	review	of	the	sales	pipeline
	z Regular	review	of	account	plans	for	every	major	client	
	z Relationship	mapping	for	major	clients
	z Flexible	pilot	projects	offerings	to	engage	the	client	early	 

in	the	process	

	z Renewed	focus	on	Partner	education	and	activation	in	 

the	marketplace

	
	
	
 
	
	
	
4.	Expanding	the	relationship	base

To	increase	the	breadth	and	depth	of	D4t4’s	revenue	streams,	

the	Group	needs	to	expand	both	the	number	of	partners	

through	which	sales	are	made	and	the	number	of	direct	

client	relationships	it	has.	To	achieve	D4t4’s	stated	financial	

performance	targets,	resources	need	to	be	carefully	allocated	

between	sales,	marketing	and	partnering	activities

5.	Developing	the	right	talent

As	the	Group	has	evolved	into	a	data-focused	technology	

and	innovation	company,	retaining,	developing	and	motivating	

existing	and	new	staff	is	even	more	essential.		As	always,	the	

challenge	is	to	create	a	balanced,	flexible,	diverse	and	highly	

talented	global	team

Management actions
	z Additional	strategic	sales	&	marketing	investment	
	z Growing	partner	base
	z Mix	of	direct	and	indirect	commercial	relationships	
	z Deeper	understanding	of	client	needs	

Management actions
	z Effective	upskilling	
	z Flexible	working	
	z Redeployment	where	possible	and	cost	effective		
	z Increased	communication	
	z Remuneration,	including	share	options	and	other	benefits,		

reviewed	annually	

23
23

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report	
Principal risks and uncertainties

D4t4	faces	the	standard	economic,	commercial	and	political	
risks	facing	a	global	technology	business	with	employees,	
customers	and	suppliers	spread	across	the	world.	Whilst	in	the	
short	term	the	extraordinary	circumstances	created	by	the	global	
pandemic	have	not	negatively	impacted	the	business,	clearly	the	
uncertainty	this	crisis	continues	to	create	impacts	the	risk	profile	
of	the	Group.		

The	risk	level	of	a	number	of	the	principal	risks	and	uncertainties	
mentioned	below	have	remained	unchanged	since	the	last	Annual	
Report	and	the	Group	remains	well-placed	to	mitigate	these.	

The	structure,	remit	and	reporting	of	the	Group’s	Risk	Committee	
is	explained	on	page	38	of	this	Annual	Report.

h
g
H

i

Y
T
I
L
I
B
A
B
O
R
P

w
o
L

2

5

3

6

1

4

7

Low

IMPACT

High

	Execution	timing 
	People	risks 
	Market	and	regulatory  

changes 

	Client	or	partner	loss 

	Foreign	currency  
	 management 
	Competition 
	Data	loss	and  
reputational	risk

RISK TREND
Increasing

 No	change

 Decreasing

RISK

RISK LEVEL

MITIGATION

Risk	remains	mitigated	with	ongoing	
improvement	to	standardised	
delivery	processes,	though	the	global	
pandemic	has	inevitably	increased	the	
risk	of	delays	in	execution.



D4t4’s	clients	are	typically	engaged	on	
multiyear	programmes,	so	the	Group	 
invests	significantly	in	sales,	marketing	and	
partner	activities	to	ensure	it	can	plan	and	
predict	the	associated	growth	and	revenue	
targets.	Collaboration	tools	are	being	used	
whilst	working	from	home	to	maintain	 
regular	and	effective	communication	with	
partners	and	clients.



Increased	risk	that	employees	may	be	
lost	on	a	temporary	basis	at	least,	due	
to	the	global	pandemic.

Key	individuals	are	identified,	succession	
plans	put	in	place	and	actions	taken	to	
spread	the	risk	between	more	individuals.	 
The	global	pandemic	risks	are	mitigated	by	
existing	and	robust	business	continuity	plans.

1

Execution	timing	

A	key	aspect	of	D4t4’s	strategy	
is	the	delivery	of	product,	
services	and	projects	in	line	
with	its	business	plan.	Failure	
to	deliver	on	our	services	within	
the	constraints	of	customers	and		
the	Group’s	fiscal	periods	would	
impact	its	overall	objectives.

2

People	risks	

A	loss	or	failure	to	attract			key	
personnel	could	impact	the	
ability	of	the	Group	to	execute	
on	its	strategy,	causing	adverse	
reputational	and	operational	
challenges.

24

	
	
RISK

RISK LEVEL

MITIGATION

3

Market	and	regulatory	changes	

The	Risk	Committee	have	carefully	
considered	this	and	deem	there	to	
be	no	change	in	risk.

The	Group	is	exposed	to	the	
risks	of	changing	regulations	for	
the	collection	of	consumer	data.	
Some	of	these	changes	could	
impact	D4t4’s	performance	and	
outlook,	positively	or	negatively.

4

Client	or	partner	loss

The	loss	of	a	key	client	or	
significant	sales	partner	would	
impact	the	ability	of	the	Group	to	
meet	its	key	business	objectives.

The	global	pandemic	has	made	it	
more	likely	that	a	client	or	partner	
could	be	lost,	though	this	risk	is	 
well	mitigated.

5

Foreign	currency	management



D4t4	closely	monitors	the	markets	in	which	
it	operates	with	enhanced	collaboration	with	
clients,	suppliers	and	partners.	It	then	plans	
product,	project	or	operational	changes	
to	ensure	it	is	minimising	the	impact	of	
changes.	The	Group	follows	proposed	
regulatory	changes	closely	and	where	
necessary	adapts	processes	and	policies.



The	business	has	specific	relationship	
management	plans	in	place	for	both	clients	
and	partners.	The	status	of	the	relationships	
is	reviewed	by	management	on	a	regular	
basis	and	actions	are	in	place	to	reduce	the	
risk	of	loss.	The	increased	risk	is	mitigated	
by	the	market	sector	in	which	the	majority	of	
the	Group’s	clients	operate,	a	move	to	a	
higher	recurring	revenue	model	with	
improved	visibility	of	future	revenues	and	
broadening	of	sales	partners.



Significant	changes	in	foreign	
exchange	rates	can	result	in	
reduced	profitability	due	to	cash	
collection	values	not	matching	
transaction	values	and	an	increased	
potential	for	currency	losses	in	the	
income	statement.

6

Competition

New	competitors	or	changes	to	
existing	competitors’	products	
can	significantly	alter	the	market	
dynamics,	which	in	turn	risks	
the	position	and	standing	that	
D4t4’s	own	Intellectual	Property	
has	in	the	financial	and	consumer	
marketplace.

As	the	global	pandemic	continues,	
the	currency	markets	are	 
particularly	volatile	and	much	
uncertainty	remains.

Foreign	currency	fluctuation	risks	are	
mitigated	via	the	use	of	vanilla	financial	
instruments,	mainly	utilising	forward	foreign	
exchange	contracts.	As	a	consequence,	
there	is	no	change	in	the	risk	profile.



The	Risk	Committee	carefully	
and	constantly	reviews	this	and	
considers	the	Group	is	ready	for	any	
opportunities	as	they	arise.

The	Group	continually	scans	the	market	
for	potential	technology	threats	and	has	a	
development	process	in	place	to	ensure	its	
own	technology	continues	to	evolve	to	meet	
client	needs,	that	cannot	be	easily	disrupted,	
and	which	can	be	protected	by	patents.

7

Data	loss	and	reputational	risk



A	significant	IP,	data	loss,	or	
security	breach	could	impact	the	
brand	and	reputation	of	the	Group.

The	Risk	Committee	have	
considered	this	with	respect	to	the	
global	pandemic	and	conclude	this	
is	mitigated	via	existing	information	
security	controls.

D4t4	is	certified	to	ISO	27001	and	operates	
an	information	security	process	that	controls	
and	minimises	the	risks.	This	process	is	
externally	assessed	yearly.	These	risks	
are	mitigated	via	existing	and	established	
information	security	controls.

25

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportCorporate responsibility

The	global	events	of	2020	have	highlighted	more	than	ever	the	need	for	businesses	to	operate	in	a	socially	

responsible	and	environmentally	sustainable	way	and	to	look	after	their	staff	by	providing	a	safe	operating	

environment.	D4t4	conduct	its	activities	to	the	highest	ethical	standards	and	expect	clients	and	suppliers	to	

embrace	these	same	principles.	

As	the	Group	expands,	it	has	formalised	

its	efforts	in	Environmental,	Social	and	

Governance	(ESG),	and	has	established	

an	ESG	Committee,	with	nine	diverse	

colleagues	from	across	the	Group	including	

a	Non-Executive	and	Executive	member.	

	z encouraging	efficient	use	of	energy,		
	 	 utilities	and	natural	resources.
	z continually	strives	to	improve		
	 	 environmental	performance.
	z communicating	its	environmental		
	 	 commitment	to	clients	and	suppliers		

The	Committee	has	focussed	on	key	

	 	 and	encouraging	their	support.

emissions	offset	options	for	the	Group	as	a	

whole,	as	well	as	recycling	initiatives.	

Energy Consumption and Waste

Following	its	refurbishment	in	2018,	the	

electricity	supply	at	D4t4’s	Head	Office	is	

based	entirely	on	100%	renewable	energy	

sources.		The	data	below	is	for	the	calendar	

years	2018,	2019	and	2020,	and	for	the	

Head	Office	only.		During	FY22,	the	ESG	

committee	will	aim	to	begin	reporting	on	

and	setting	targets	to	reduce	emissions	for	

all	operations	worldwide.		It	should	be	noted	

that	the	2020	data	is	heavily	skewed	by	the	

global	pandemic	which	significantly	reduced	

energy	and	waste	consumption	in	the	office	

due	to	the	majority	of	staff	working	from	

Carbon emissions

The	Group’s	recent	Head	Office	

refurbishment	was	conducted	with	a	

strong	environmental	ethos	at	its	core,	

focusing	on	delivering	the	latest	standards	

in	insulation,	lighting,	heating	and	energy	

waste	reduction.	

The	electricity	supply	at	D4t4’s	Head	Office	

is	based	entirely	on	renewable	energy	

sources.	In	addition,	an	electric	vehicle	car	

home	for	most	of	the	year.

charging	facility	has	been	installed.	

The	rollout	of	improved	office	collaboration	

software	is	facilitating	a	more	dynamic	and	

flexible	workforce	whilst	further	reducing	

travel	and	associated	environmental	impacts.

Further,	the	ESG	Committee	has	agreed	that	

over	the	coming	year,	the	Group	will	increase	

its	focus	on	energy	minimisation,	the	use	of	

renewable	energy,	considerations	of	carbon	

Total energy (KWh)

Total waste (kg)

-53%

Electricity	-48%
Gas	-91%

-18%

Recycling	-32%
General	waste	-14%

environmental	aspects	and,	in	light	of	the	
global	pandemic,	charitable	activities. 

Environment

Policy statement

D4t4	cares	about	the	environment	and	

fully	supports,	and	is	committed	to,	the	

principles	of	promoting	good	environmental	

practice	and	sustainability	in	the	conduct	

of	its	activities.	The	Group	wants	to	ensure	

that	any	adverse	effects	on	the	environment	

are	kept	to	a	minimum.

It	aims	to	do	this	by:

	z wholly	supporting	the	requirements		
	 	 of	accepted	international	standards		

	 	 and	current	EU	environmental		

legislation	and	codes	of	practice.
	z minimising	consumption	through		

the	reduction,	reuse	or	recycling	of		

	 	 materials	as	much	as	possible.

2020

177,533

3,692

181,224

623

3,158

3,781

16%

2019

342,783

39,673

382,456

922

3,664

4,585

20%

2018

Variance

275,041

99,227

374,268

1,521

963

2,484

61%

-165,250

-35,981

-201,232

-299

-506

-804

-4%

%

-48%

-91%

-53%

-32%

-14%

-18%

-18%

Electricity	(KWh)

Gas	(KWh)

Total	energy	(KWh)

Recycling	(kg)

General	waste	(kg)

Total	waste	(kg)

%	recycling

26

	 	
	 	
Charitable activity 

D4t4	will	uphold	all	laws	relevant	to	

Health & safety 

Although	D4t4	has	always	informally	

countering	bribery	and	corruption	in	all	the	

supported	charitable	activities	for	many	

jurisdictions	in	which	it	operates.

D4t4	is	committed	to	maintaining	high	

standards	of	health	and	safety.	

years,	the	impact	of	the	global	pandemic	

has	prompted	a	refresh	and	reassessment	of	

the	Group’s	activities.	To	better	understand	

its	global	colleagues,	and	as	part	of	the	

initiatives	started	by	the	ESG	committee,	the	

and	abroad.

As	a	UK	plc,	the	Group	remains	bound	by	

The	Group’s	response	to	the	global	

the	laws	of	the	UK,	including	the	Bribery	Act	

pandemic	has	clearly	been	a	priority	and	

2010,	in	respect	of	its	conduct	both	at	home	

it	has	been	and	remains	committed	to	

ensuring	the	safety	of	all	colleagues	both	

now	and	in	the	future.	All	colleagues	are	set	

up	for	home	working	and	able	to	fulfil	duties	

remotely.		Office	layouts	and	guidelines	

have	been	introduced	for	colleagues	

working	in	the	office,	and	for	any	visitors	to	

the	Group’s	offices	in	line	with	government	

Group	is	now	launching	a	survey	to	assess	

Modern slavery

what	colleagues	care	most	about	and	would	

D4t4	has	a	zero-tolerance	approach	to	

like	to	support	going	forward.	D4t4	will	look	to	

modern	slavery	and	will	act	ethically	and	

implement	a	range	of	initiatives	and	activities	

with	integrity	in	all	its	business	dealings	and	

during	2021.	

Colleagues

D4t4’s	key	asset	is	its	staff.	The	Group	values	

teamwork,	taking	personal	responsibility,	

positive	attitudes	and	working	hard	to	deliver	

beneficial	outcomes	for	clients,	staff	and	

shareholders	alike.	The	Group	encourages	

personal	learning	and	development	to	

create	a	more	sustainable	workforce	and	is	

very	proud	of	its	low	attrition	rates	with	the	

average	length	of	tenure	being	over	9	years.

relationships.	The	Group’s	approach	is	also	

underlined	by	its	recognition	and	support	

recommended	procedures.	

for	the	UDHR	and	UN	Global	Compact.	

Supplier	engagement	includes	a	check	on	

approach	to	modern	slavery	and	a	record	

is	noted	with	respect	to	their	statement	on	

modern	slavery.

Diversity and Inclusion 

Creating	a	diverse,	inclusive	and	great	 

place	for	colleagues	to	work	is	a	core	 

focus	for	the	Group.	It	also	fosters	an	

environment	that	enhances	innovation,	

The	ESG	committee	will	be	looking	at	ways	

creativity	and	productivity.

to	continue	to	improve	employee	wellbeing,	

teamworking	and	communication	in	the	

coming	months.

Ethical Business Practices

Human rights

D4t4	Solutions	fully	recognises	and	

supports	the	protection	of	Human	Rights,	

the	UN	Universal	Declaration	of	Human	

Rights	(UDHR)	and	the	ten	principles	of	the	

UN	Global	Compact.

Anti-corruption and bribery

In	order	to	provide	equal	employment	

and	advancement	opportunities	to	all	

individuals,	employment	decisions	at	 

D4t4	are	based	on	merit,	qualifications	 

and	abilities.	

Except	where	required	by	law,	employment	

practices	will	not	be	influenced	or	affected	

by	an	applicant’s	or	employee’s	race,	colour,	

religion,	gender,	national	origin,	political	

affiliation,	marital	status,	sexual	orientation,	

age	or	any	other	characteristic	protected	

by	law.	

It	is	the	Group’s	policy	to	conduct	all	its	

This	policy	governs	all	aspects	of	

business	in	an	honest	and	ethical	manner.	It	

employment,	including	selection,	job	

takes	a	zero-tolerance	approach	to	bribery	

assignment,	compensation,	discipline,	

and	corruption	and	is	committed	to	acting	

termination,	and	access	to	benefits	 

professionally,	fairly	and	with	integrity	in	all	its	

and	training.

business	dealings	and	relationships	wherever	

it	operates	-	implementing	and	enforcing	

effective	systems	to	counter	bribery.

27

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic reportSection 172 statement – our stakeholders 

The	Board	recognises	the	importance	of	setting	high	standards	of	corporate	governance	and	complying	with	all	legal	requirements.	In	particular,	

the	Directors	are	required	to	act	in	accordance	with	a	set	of	general	duties	as	detailed	within	section	172	of	the	UK	Companies	Act	2006.	These	

duties	are	summarised	as	follows;	

A	Director	of	a	Company	must	act	in	a	way	they	consider,	in	good	faith,	would	be	most	likely	to	promote	the	success	of	the	company	for	the	

benefit	of	its	shareholders	as	a	whole	and,	in	doing	so,	have	regard	(amongst	other	matters)	to:	

	z The	likely	consequences	of	any	decisions	in	the	long-term
	z The	interests	of	the	Group’s	employees
	z The	need	to	foster	the	Group’s	business	relationships	with	suppliers,	customers	and	others
	z The	impact	of	the	Group’s	operations	on	the	community	and	environment
	z The	desirability	of	the	Group	to	maintain	a	reputation	for		high	standards	of	business	conduct;	and	
	z The	need	to	act	fairly	as	between	shareholders	of	the	Company.

Our stakeholders 

The	Board	during	its	discussions,	deliberations	and	decision-making,	acknowledges	its	duty	to	consider	the	needs	and	concerns	of	the	

Group’s	key	stakeholders.	How	this	has	been	discharged	under	section	172	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	is	further	available	in	the	rest	of	this	

Strategic	Report	on	pages	4	to	29	and	Corporate	Governance	Report	on	pages	31	to	55.	

Employees 

Employee briefings

Suppliers 

Trusted pertnerships

Quarterly	briefing	sessions	are	held	with	the	Board	to	enable	

The	Board	is	committed	to	building 	 

colleagues	to	ask	questions,	raise	issues	and	to	be	provided	with	

trusted	partnerships	with	the	Group’s	suppliers,	which	are 	

updates	on	the	business.

Performance updates

crucial	to	delivering	many	of	our	commitments.

Engagement and communication

Key	performance	information	such	as	trading	updates	and	financial	

We	have	in	place	a	programme	which	ensures	regular 	

results	are	always	promptly	communicated	to	the	Group.	

engagement	and	communication	with	all	key	strategic	partners 	

Surveys

Confidential	surveys	are	performed	in	the	Group	and	action	plans	

and	suppliers.

Partner portal 

are	developed	in	response.

Partner	portal	re-launch	has	better	enabled	our	partners	around 	

Share schemes

The	Group	has	in	place	Share	Option	Plans	to	enable	employees	to	

become	personally	invested	as	shareholders	of	the	Group.	

the	globe	for	our	Celebrus	family	of	products.

28

 
 
Customers 

Shareholders 

Customer Advisory Board (CAB)

Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) 

Creation	of	a	CAB	with	a	global	remit	to	ensure	proper	flow	of	

The	AGM	is	a	key	opportunity	for	engagement	between	the 	

information	from	our	key	customers	to	our	engineering	teams.	

Board	and	shareholders.

This	is	also	used	to	vet	and	adjust	upcoming	product	roadmaps	

to	ensure	we	are	solving	for	the	key	issues	in	the	marketplace.

Analysts and investor meetings 

Customer and Partner portal

The	Executive	Board	hold	analyst	and	investor	roadshows 	

meetings	throughout	the	year,	particularly	following	the	release 	

Redevelopment	and	launch	of	our	Customer	and	Partner	portal	

of	the	Group’s	interim	and	full	year	results	and	feedback	from 	

to	allow	for	better	sharing	of	information	and	more	engagement	

those	meetings	is	shared	with	the	Board.

with	all	parties.

Customer success meetings

Annual Report and Accounts  

The	Group’s	Annual	Report	and	Accounts	is	made	available	to 	

Ongoing	Customer	Success	meetings	and	development	of	

all	shareholders	both	online	and	in	hard	copy	where	requested.

strategic	plans	for	existing	customers	on	an	annual	basis.

Group website   

Service reviews

Presentations	and	announcements	and	other	key	shareholder 	

Regular	service	reviews	with	customers		

information	is	available	on	the	investor	section	of	the	Group’s 	

to	ensure	we	continue	to	add	value	across	our	customer	base.

website.

Key resources

Investment	in	key	resources	around	the	globe	to	continue	to	

support	our	growth	and	existing	customers.

Marketing and messaging

Various	marketing	and	messaging	to	not	only	ensure	awareness	

of	new	features	but	to	also	support	our	customer	onboarding	

into	the	newer	platforms	of	Celebrus.

Case studies

Inclusion	of	key	customer	case	studies	as	part	of	our	PR	

campaign	to	raise	awareness	of	the	value	of	the	Celebrus	family	

of	products.

This	strategic	report	was	approved	by	the	Board	on	28	July	2021	and	signed	on	its	behalf	by:	

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer

29

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Strategic report 
 
Corporate Governance

Contents
  31	 Chairman’s	introduction	to	governance
  32	 Board	of	Directors
  34	 Statement	of	corporate	governance
  44	 Audit	Committee	report
  45	 Nomination	Committee	report
  46	 Remuneration	Committee	report
  47	 Directors’	Remuneration	report
  52	 Directors’	report
  55	 Statement	of	Directors’	responsibilities

30

Chairman’s introduction to governance

Dear Shareholder

The	incidence	of	the	global	pandemic	this	calendar	year	has	

I	am	pleased	to	report	on	the	corporate	governance	procedures	

resulted	in	unprecedented	times.	Noting	that	uncertainty	is	

undertaken	by	D4t4	for	the	financial	year	2021.	

commonplace	in	the	world	both	economically	and	societally,	the	

The	Board	recognises	the	importance	of	high	standards	of	

corporate	governance	for	delivering	long-term	success	to	the	

Group	and	acknowledges	its	role	in	setting	the	culture,	values	and	

ethics	of	the	Group	(as	outlined	in	Principle	8)	and	communicating	

these	to	all	the	Group’s	stakeholders.	

This	requirement	is	set	out	formally	on	the	following	page.	The	

Board	meets	regularly	to	discuss	the	monitoring	and	promotion	

of	a	healthy	corporate	culture.	The	Chairman	has	ultimate	

responsibility	for	corporate	governance	matters	and	has	overseen	

the	preparation	of	this	governance	statement	accordingly.

Board	of	D4t4	continues	to	recognise	that	now	more	than	ever	

there	is	a	need	for	strong	leadership.	Since	March	2020	the	Board	

has	embarked	on	holding	additional	meetings	to	coordinate	the	

operations	of	the	business,	whilst	ensuring	the	safety	and	welfare	

of	its	employees.	

As	mentioned	in	my	statement	on	page	3	various	Board	changes	

have	occurred	during	the	financial	year	and	after	the	year	end.	

These	changes	give	the	opportunity	to	streamline	the	main	D4t4	

Board	to	allow	increased	focus	on	corporate	governance,	group	

strategy	formulation	as	well	as	investor	and	wider	stakeholder	

relations.	From	the	1st	of	July	2021	the	Board	of	D4t4	will	consist	

AIM	Rule	26	was	amended	to	require	all	AIM	companies	to	

of	the	Chief	Executive	Officer,	the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	

disclose	details	of	a	recognised	corporate	governance	code	

two	Non-Executive	Directors	and	(upon	making	a	permanent	

that	its	Board	of	Directors	has	decided	to	apply,	how	the	Group	

appointment)	the	Chief	Financial	Officer.

complies	with	that	code	and,	where	it	departs	from	its	chosen	

corporate	governance	code,	an	explanation	of	the	reasons	for	

doing	so.	

Finally,	the	Board	continues	to	engage	with	shareholders	and	

welcomes	ongoing	dialogue	throughout	the	year.	Due	to	the	

pandemic,	this	year’s	AGM	will	be	a	closed	meeting	but	I	welcome	

The	Board	believes	the	Quoted	Companies	Alliance	Corporate	

your	participation	in	the	accompanying	online	investor	meeting	

Governance	Code	2018	(“QCA	Code”)	is	the	most	applicable	set	

immediately	afterwards.

of	principles	for	governance	considering	the	size,	resource	and	

current	development	stage	the	Company	is	in.	Board	discussions	

are	conducted	openly	and	transparently,	which	creates	an	

environment	for	sustainable	and	robust	debate.	In	the	year,	the	

Board	has	constructively	and	proactively	challenged	management	

on	Group	strategies,	proposals,	operating	performance	and	key	

A	statement	of	the	Directors’	responsibilities	in	respect	of	the	

accounts	is	set	out	on	page	55	of	the	2021	Annual	Report.

decisions,	as	part	of	its	ongoing	work	to	assess	and	safeguard	the	

By	order	of	the	Board

position	and	prospects	of	the	Group.

Key	risks	and	uncertainties	affecting	the	business	are	regularly	

assessed	and	updated.	The	Board	challenges	management	to	

ensure	appropriate	risk	mitigation	measures	are	in	place.	The	

Board	has	completed	a	full,	specific	review	of	the	Group’s	key	risks	

and	uncertainties	(pages	24-25	of	the	2021	Annual	Report),	in	light 

of	the	new	and	emerging	risks	or	uncertainties	arising	from	the	

Group’s	strategic	growth	plans	and	the	wider	economic,	political	

and	market	conditions.	As	part	of	a	critical	review	of	the	Group’s	

procedures,	a	rolling	risk	review	process	has	been	developed	

which	seeks	to	ensure	that	risks	are	constantly	monitored,	

assessed	and	quantified,	so	that	action	may	be	prioritised	by	the	

Board	accordingly.

Peter	Simmonds
Non-Executive Chairman
28 July 2021

31

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceBoard of Directors

Peter Simmonds

Non-Executive  
Chairman

Peter Kear

Chief Executive 
Officer

Jim Dodkins

Chief Technical 
Officer

Peter	was	appointed	to	the	Board	

Peter	co-founded	D4t4	Solutions	in	

Jim	is	responsible	for	the	Group’s	

as	Chairman	in	April	2015.	He	was	

1985.	Prior	to	this	he	was	a	divisional	

strategic	direction	in	technology,	

CEO	of	dotDigital	Group	plc	for	eight	

director	for	Hawke	Electronics,	then	

specialising	in	solution	architecture	

years	and	a	major	contributor	to	their	

a	subsidiary	of	Lex	Service	plc.	He	

for	D4t4	Solutions	and	its	clients,	and	

success	prior	to	stepping	down.	He	is	

became	CEO	in	2016,	having	been	

is	a	member	of	the	Risk	Committee.	

also	Chairman	of	Cloudcall	Group	plc	

responsible	until	then	for	both	the	

Prior	to	joining	D4t4	Solutions	he	

and	is	a	Board	member	of	the	Quoted	

sales	and	business	development	

worked	for	Logica	plc	in	various	

Company	Alliance.

aspects	of	the	Company.	His	position	

roles,	where	he	gained	wide	industry	

COMMITTEES

A

N

Re

as	CEO	involves	overall	responsibility	

experience	and	later	managed	the	

for	the	management	of	the	Group’s	

division	responsible	for	projects	in	the	

activities	and	he	works	closely	with	

broadcast	and	media	sector.

the	other	Executive	Directors	on	 

the	determination	of	the	Group’s	

overall	strategy.

COMMITTEES

N

COMMITTEES

Ri

32

Mark Boxall

Chief Operating 
Officer

Monika Biddulph

Non-Executive  
Director

Peter Whiting

Non-Executive  
Director

Mark	brings	a	wealth	of	knowledge	

Monika	has	a	wide	range	of	

Over	a	30-year	career,	Peter	has	

and	experience	in	the	areas	of	sales,	

experience	in	both	the	commercial	

gained	extensive	financial	and	

delivery,	operations	and	finance	

and	technical	aspects	of	an	

commercial	experience.	His	core	

having	been	both	board	director	

international	technology	business.	In	

skills	are	centred	around	the	financial	

and	senior	manager	at	technology	

over	twenty	years	at	ARM,	Monika	

services	and	technology	industries;	

consultancies	and	product	based	

held	various	General	Manager,	IP	

he	has	the	proven	ability	to	quickly	

technology	companies	such	as	rbase,	

licensing	and	technical	roles	in	the	

understand	complex	technologies	

Morse,	PTC	and	Siemens,	and	most	

business.	Currently	Monika	is	also	a	

and	their	applications	and	at	the	

recently	Dell	EMC.

Non-Executive	Director	on	the	board	

same	time	successfully	developed	

of	Ilika	plc.	She	was	previously	NED	

strong	interpersonal	and	management	

at	Linaro	Limited,	and	holds	a	PhD	in	

skills	which	have	enabled	him	to	build	

High	Energy	Particle	Physics	from	the	

a	technology-led	NED	portfolio.	He	

ETH	Zurich.	She	was	appointed	to	

is	currently	a	Non-Executive	Director	

the	Board	in	December	2019.

of	Aptitude	Software	Group	plc,	FDM	

Group	plc	and	Keystone	Law	plc.	

COMMITTEES

A

N Re

COMMITTEES

A

N Re

BOARD OF DIRECTORS KEY

EXECUTIVE

NON-EXECUTIVE

COMMITTEE MEMBERSHIP

A

N

Re

Ri

Audit	Committee

Nomination	Committee

Remuneration	Committee

Risk	sub-Committee

Chair	of	Committee

33

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceStatement of corporate governance

The	likely	consequences	of	any	decisions	in	

Please	refer	to	Principle	1	–	“Establish	a	strategy	and	business	model	which	promote	

the	long-term

long-term	value	for	shareholders”	on	page	35	and	Principle	9	–	“Maintain	governance	

structures	and	processes	that	are	fit	for	purpose	and	support	good	decision-making	by	

the	Board”	on	page	42.

The	interests	of	the	Group’s	employees

Please	refer	to	Principle	3	–	“Take	into	account	wider	stakeholder	and	social	responsibilities	

and	their	implications	for	long-term	success”	on	page	36.		Particular	attention	is	drawn	to	

the	section	on	staff.

The	need	to	foster	the	Group’s	business	

Please	refer	to	Principle	3	–	“Take	into	account	wider	stakeholder	and	social	

relationships	with	suppliers,	customers	 

responsibilities	and	their	implications	for	long-term	success”	on	page	36.	Particular	

and	others	

attention	is	drawn	to	the	sections	on	clients,	suppliers	and	industry	bodies.

The	impact	of	the	Group’s	operations	on	 

Please	refer	to	Principle	3	–	“Take	into	account	wider	stakeholder	and	social	

the	community	and	environment	

responsibilities	and	their	implications	for	long-term	success”	on	page	36.	Particular	

attention	is	drawn	to	the	sections	on	communities	and	the	environment.

The	desirability	of	the	Group	to	maintain	a	

Please	refer	to	Principle	8	–	“Promote	a	corporate	culture	that	is	based	on	ethical	values	

reputation	for	high	standards	of	business	

and	behaviours”	on	page	41.

conduct	

The	need	to	act	fairly	as	between	the	

Please	refer	to	Principle	1	–	“Establish	a	strategy	and	business	model	which	promote	

shareholders	of	the	Group	

long-term	value	for	shareholders”	on	page	35	and	Principle	2	–	“Seek	to	understand	and	

meet	shareholder	needs	and	expectations”,	also	on	page	35.

This	statement	explains	how	D4t4	Solutions	plc	has	applied	the	main	and	supporting	principles	of	corporate	governance	and	describes	the	

Group’s	compliance	with	the	provisions	of	the	QCA	Corporate	Governance	Code	(2018).

For	the	purposes	of	clarity	and	candour,	the	description	of	how	the	Group	complies	with	the	ten	key	principles	of	the	QCA	Code	begins	

with	a	summary	of	the	two	areas	where	the	Group	does	not	yet	fully	comply,	followed	by	a	review	of	each	of	the	principles	in	turn.

No	significant	corporate	governance	matters	arose	during	the	period	covered	by	the	2021	Annual	Report	nor	subsequently	to	the	date	of	

this	statement	on	which	it	was	considered	necessary	for	the	Board	or	any	of	its	Committees	to	seek	external	advice.

The	Board	consults	with	its	Nominated	Adviser	and	other	professional	advisers	on	routine	matters	arising	in	the	ordinary	course	of	its	business.

Exceptions to the application of the QCA Code

The	following	table	summarises	the	specific	areas	within	one	of	the	principles	where	the	Board	considers	that	the	Group	does	not	fully	

comply,	or	may	be	perceived	as	not	fully	complying,	with	the	QCA	Code.

Principle 5  
(Maintain the Board as a well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the Chair)

Exceptions and explanations

Application:	The	Board	should	 

During	the	2020/21	financial	year,	the	Board	consisted	of	8	members,	4	Executive	and	4	

have	an	appropriate	balance	 

Non-Executive	of	whom	3	were	considered	independent.	On	31	March	2021	and	 

between	Executive	and	 

Non-Executive	Directors.

34

28	April	2021	respectively,	J	Lythall	and	C	Irvine	resigned	from	the	Board.	On	30	June	

2021	J	Dodkins	and	M	Boxall	resigned	from	the	Board.	This	means	that	as	at	28	July	

2021,	the	Board	comprises	one	Executive	and	three	Non-Executive	members,	all	of	

whom	are	considered	independent.	The	general	expectation	that	at	least	half	of	a	Board	

should	be	independent	Non-Executives	has	been	satisfied	since	year-end.

Principle 6  
(Ensure that between them the Directors 
have the necessary up-to-date experience, 
skills and capabilities)

Exceptions and explanations

Application: The	Board	should	contain	the	

The	male	to	female	ratio	on	the	Board	is	presently	3:1	and	there	are	currently	no	female	

necessary	mix	of	experience,	skills,	personal	

Executive	Directors.	We	believe	that	this	reflects	a	strong	gender	bias	in	the	technology	

qualities	(including	gender	balance)	and	

industry	as	a	whole,	and	the	Board	remains	confident	both	that	the	opportunities	in	the	

capabilities	to	deliver	the	Group’s	strategy	

Group	are	not	excluded	or	limited	by	any	diversity	issues	(including	gender)	and	that	the	

over	the	medium	to	long	term.

Board	nevertheless	contains	the	necessary	mix	of	experience,	skills	and	other	personal	

qualities	and	capabilities	necessary	to	deliver	its	strategy.

The Principles of the QCA Code

Principle 1 - Establish a strategy and business model which promote long-term value for shareholders

The	Board’s	shared	view	of	the	Group’s	purpose,	business	model,	opportunities	and	strategy,	and	the	values	underpinning	them,	are	

detailed	in	the	Strategic	Report	within	pages	12	to	19	of	the	2021	Annual	Report	as	follows:

	z “What	we	do”	(pages	12	to	17)	explains	what	D4t4	Solutions’	services	and	products	are.
	z “Vision	and	strategy”	(pages	18	to	19)	considers	how	D4t4	Solutions	seeks	to	realise	its’	vision	of	earning	high-margin,	recurring	revenues.
	z “Business	model	and	opportunities”	(pages	12	to	19)	reviews	D4t4	Solutions’	key	strengths,	capabilities	and	values.	This	is	further		

illustrated	with	a	case	study	(pages	20	to	21).

The	Group’s	approach	to	delivering	long-term	value	for	shareholders	is	addressed	in	the	Statement	of	the	Chief	Executive	Officer	on	pages	

4	to	7.	Pages	18	to	19	set	out	the	Group’s	Vision	and	Strategy	and	pages	24	to	25	(“Principal	risks	and	uncertainties”)	detail	the	key	risks	

faced	by	the	business	and	how	these	continue	to	be	addressed.

Principle 2 – Seek to understand and meet shareholder needs and expectations

Relations with shareholders and dialogue with institutional shareholders

The	Board	as	a	whole	is	responsible	for	ensuring	that	a	dialogue	is	maintained	with	shareholders	based	on	the	mutual	understanding	 

of	objectives.

Members	of	the	Board	meet	with	major	shareholders	on	a	regular	basis,	including	presentations	after	the	Group’s	announcement	of	the	

year-end	results	and	at	the	half	year.

In	addition	to	regulatory	news	announcements	the	Directors	have	published	the	annual	report	and	accounts,	the	annual	results	

presentation,	the	half	year	results	and	announcements	on	new	contract	wins	as	they	arise.

In	the	period	from	1	April	2020	to	the	date	of	this	corporate	governance	statement,	the	following	activities	and	events	with	stakeholders	

have	been	arranged	with	the	view	to:

	z Communicating	the	Group’s	business	model,	strategy	and	values,	
	z Provide	financial	updates	and	explanations	sought	by	shareholders,	and
	z Engage	with	shareholders	to	fully	understand	their	needs	and	expectations.

35

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance	
Date

Description of engagement

Group participants

Notes

June	2020

Preliminary	results	roadshow

P	Kear,	C	Irvine

August	2020

AGM

Directors

Shareholders	invited	to	attend	online	Q&A	

session	due	to		the	global	pandemic	

November	2020

Interim	results	roadshow

P	Kear,	C	Irvine

June	2021

Preliminary	results	roadshow

P	Kear,	G	(Bill)	Bruno,	 

N	Patel

August	2021

AGM	(scheduled	26	August)

Directors

Shareholders	invited	to	attend	with	Q&A	session	

(TBC	due	to	the	global	pandemic)

Various

Shareholder/potential	

P	Kear,	G	(Bill)	Bruno,	 

shareholder	meetings

N	Patel

The	Board	is	kept	informed	of	the	views	of	shareholders	and	other	stakeholders	at	each	monthly	Board	meeting	through	a	report	from	the	

Chief	Executive	Officer	together	with	formal	feedback	on	shareholders’	views	gathered	and	supplied	by	the	Group’s	advisers.	The	views	of	

private	and	smaller	shareholders,	typically	arising	from	the	AGM	or	from	direct	contact	with	the	Group,	are	also	communicated	to	the	Board	

on	a	regular	basis.

P	Simmonds	is	available	to	shareholders	if	they	have	concerns	where	contact	through	the	normal	channel	of	Chief	Executive	Officer	has	

failed	to	resolve	or	for	which	such	contact	is	inappropriate.	P	Simmonds	can	be	contacted	through	the	UK	head	office	contact	information	

shown	on	our	website.

Constructive use of the AGM

The	Board	uses	the	AGM	to	communicate	with	private	and	institutional	investors	and	welcomes	their	participation.	

All	members	of	the	Board	usually	attend	the	AGM	but	due	to	the	global	pandemic	this	was	not	possible	last	year.		Instead,	the	AGM	was	a	

closed	meeting	but	all	shareholders	were	invited	to	attend	an	online	presentation	and	Q&A	session	immediately	afterwards.

At	all	investor	meetings,	shareholders	are	asked	to	confirm	that	their	questions	have	been	successfully	answered.	At	the	year	end	

and	interim	presentations	to	shareholders,	the	Group’s	Nominated	Advisor	consults	with	attendees	for	feedback	to	ensure	that	future	

presentations	encapsulate	their	requirements	where	possible.

Principle 3 – Take into account wider stakeholder and social responsibilities and their implications for long-term success

The	Board	is	fully	aware	that	the	long	term	success	of	the	Group	relies	upon	maintaining	successful	relationships	with	a	range	of	different	

stakeholders,	both	internal	and	external.	The	table	below	identifies	who	the	key	stakeholders	are	and	how	we	engage	with	them.

Stakeholders

Reason for engagement

How we engage

Staff

Our	ability	to	provide	an	industry	

We	have	identified	our	internal	values	in	order	to	recruit	and	maintain	talented	

leading	software	and	services	

and	motivated	staff.	These	values	form	the	basis	of	all	communications	which	

business	is	dependent	upon	

are	sought	through	internal	appraisals	and	regular	cross-functional	meetings.		

good	communications	within	our	

There	are	also	regular	opportunities	for	the	staff	to	engage	with	other	parts	

organisation.

of	the	organisation	and	recognise	the	successes	of	others.	Examples	include	

fortnightly	staff	breakfasts	and	quarterly	Group-wide	“Town	Hall”	meetings,	

which	are	held	to	provide	staff	with	an	operational	and	sales	update	on	what	

is	happening	within	the	business	and	ask	any	questions	they	may	have	of	any	

of	the	Executive	Team.	

36

Stakeholders

Reason for engagement

How we engage

Clients	&	

Partners

Understanding	current	and	

We	have	account	managers	and	account	directors	whose	primary	

emerging	requirements	of	clients	

responsibility	is	to	engage	with	our	clients	and	partners	to	understand	and	

enables	us	to	develop	new	and	

develop	our	products	and	services	so	that	we	can	work	with	them	to	exceed	

enhanced	services,	together	with	

their	requirements.

software	to	support	the	fulfilment	

of	those	services.

In	relation	to	our	own	IP	products	we	seek	formal	and	informal	feedback	on	

product	roadmap	and	enhancements	via	our	support	offering	and	annual	user	

group	meetings.

Suppliers

Our	relationships	with	our	

We	treat	all	suppliers	as	individuals,	build	long	term	collaborative	relationships	

suppliers	are	key	to	the	core	

and	where	possible	work	within	the	local	community.	Our	partnership	and	

success	of	our	business.

purchasing	teams	seek	to	build	ongoing	communication	with	our	suppliers	

so	that	feedback	can	be	received	and	acted	upon.	We	seek	to	ensure	that	

supplier	invoices	are	processed	and	paid	promptly.

Shareholders

As	a	public	company	it	is	vital	that	

This	is	achieved	in	several	ways:	

we	build	relationships	with	our	

shareholders	so	that	we	can	both	

inform	them	of	our	successes	and	

listen	to	their	guidance.

	z Regulatory	news	releases
	z Investor	relations	section	of	the	Group’s	website	
	z Annual	and	half-year	reports	and	presentations	
	z AGM
	z Capital	Markets	day	and	Technology	demo	events

Our	intention	is	to	engage	with	our	shareholders	to	inform	them	of	our	

successes	and	to	listen	to	the	question	and	comments.	This	feedback	is	

usually	received	at	the	AGM	and	the	investor	presentations.

Industry	bodies

Information	security	is	fundamental	

We	have	an	established	information	security	management	system	which	

to	our	business,	clients,	partners,	

encompasses	independently	audited	ISO27001	and	PCI	DSS	controls,	

suppliers	and	associated	data	

industry	best	practices,	as	well	as	latest	regulatory	requirements	including	

subjects	and	so	we	ensure	that	our	

General	Data	Protection	Regulations	(GDPR)	and	the	UK	Data	Protection	

policies	and	procedures	provide	

Act	(2018).	Our	experienced	Information	Security	Committee	ensure	that	

a	cohesive	approach	to	this	

governance,	risk	and	compliance	is	actively	managed	and	that	our	policies	

important	area.

and	procedures	evolve	to	meet	ongoing	requirements.

Communities

We	consider	that	it	is	important	

We	look	to	recruit	locally	experienced	staff	and	through	the	local	universities,	

to	be	a	business	that	makes	a	

both	in	the	UK	and	India.	We	employ	local	suppliers	where	possible	and	

positive	contribution	to	local	

throughout	the	year,	we	encourage	staff	to	identify	charities	that	they	have	an	

economies	and	is	attractive	as	an	

affiliation	with	for	the	Group	as	a	whole	to	support.

employer	and	partner.

37

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceStakeholders

Reason for engagement

How we engage

Environment

Irrespective	of	our	status	as	

We	endeavour	to	use	technology	wherever	possible	such	that	meetings	with	

a	public	company,	it	is	part	of	

both	internal	and	external	stakeholders	can	be	held	online,	thus	reducing	the	

our	ethos	to	conduct	business	

need	for	travel.

operations	that	minimise	any	

adverse	impact	on	the	climate	

these	may	have.	

This	further	extends	to	allowing	employees	to	work	at	home,	further	reducing	

commuting	costs	on	both	economic	and	environmental	grounds.

In	addition,	our	HQ	at	Sunbury	was	recently	refurbished	using	the	latest	

standards	in	insulation,	lighting,	heating	and	energy	waste	reduction	and	is	

now	fully	powered	using	renewable	resources.

Principle 4 – Embed effective risk management, considering both opportunities and threats, throughout the organisation

The	Board’s	risk	management	controls	and	mitigation	strategies	are	described	in	the	2021	Annual	Report	at	pages	24	to	25	(“Principal	risks	

and	uncertainties”)	and	pages	41	to	42	outline	the	control	environment	the	Board	has	put	in	place	–	as	per	Principles	8	and	9	of	the	QCA	

Code	–	to	promote	a	corporate	culture	based	on	ethical	values	and	behaviours	and	to	maintain	governance	structures	and	processes	that	

are	fit	for	purpose	and	support	good	decision-making	by	the	Board.

The	Directors	and	management	have	a	clear	responsibility	for	identifying	risks	facing	each	of	the	businesses	and	for	putting	in	place	

procedures	to	mitigate	and	monitor	risks.	To	this	end	the	Company	has	a	Risk	sub-Committee	appointed	by,	and	reporting	directly	to,	the	

Board.	It	currently	consists	of	the	Chief	Technology	Officer,	the	interim	Chief	Financial	Officer,	the	Director	of	Finance	and	the	Information	

Security	and	Process	Manager;	other	members	of	the	Company	are	seconded	to	the	Committee	as	required.

The	remit	of	the	Committee	is	to	examine	the	vulnerability	of	the	Group	to	all	types	of	risk,	the	mitigation	of	such	risks,	maintain	the	

risk	register	to	properly	reflect	this	and	to	report	back	to	the	Board	with	any	changes	in,	or	new	areas	of,	vulnerability	to	risks	and	

recommendations	for	mitigation.

This	is	done	at	three	levels:

	z A	review	of	the	risk	register	is	included	in	the	monthly	Board	pack	
	z A	quarterly	report	provided	to	the	Board
	z A	formal	assessment	of	risks	during	the	annual	budget	process 

The	Risk	Committee	meets	every	two	months,	or	more	often	as	required,	and	on	each	occasion	reviews	two	areas	of	the	corporate	risk	

register	in	detail	to	assess	the	vulnerability	of	the	Group	to	risks	under	consideration	and	how	to	mitigate	such	risks.	Employees	from	with	

the	relevant	areas	of	the	business	are	invited	to	help	provide	a	more	informed	opinion	of	which	risks	are	key	and	how	they	can	be	managed.	

The	Committee	report	back	to	the	Board	with	any	changes	in,	or	new	areas	of,	vulnerability	to	risks	and	recommendations	for	mitigation.	

The	global	pandemic	is	an	example	of	an	occasion	when	the	Risk	Committee	has	convened	more	frequently	in	order	to	review	the	register	

for	any	changes	to	the	level	of	risk	due	to	the	pandemic	and	the	emergence	of	any	new	issues	which	may	require	mitigation.		

Principle 5 – Maintain the Board as a well-functioning, balanced team led by the Chair

Composition

Directors’	biographies	are	shown	both	in	the	2021	Annual	Report	on	pages	32	to	33	and	on	the	Group’s	website.

The	Board	is	currently	comprised	of	the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	one	Executive	Director	and	a	further	two	Non-Executive	Directors.	From	

the	1st	of	July	2021	the	Board	of	D4t4	consists	of	the	Chief	Executive	Officer,	the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	two	Non-Executive	Directors	

and	(upon	making	a	permanent	appointment)	the	Chief	Financial	Officer.	At	the	date	of	this	corporate	governance	statement,	all	of	the	Non-

38

 
Executive	Directors	are	considered	to	be	independent.	The	Board	does	not	consider	it	necessary	to	appoint	an	independent	Director	to	a	

formal	“Senior	Independent	Director”	role.		

All	Directors	are	subject	to	election	by	shareholders	at	the	first	AGM	immediately	following	their	appointment	and	thereafter	are	subject	to	

re-election	at	intervals	of	no	more	than	three	years.	All	Non-Executive	Directors	are	appointed	for	fixed	terms	in	line	with	corporate	governance	

requirements,	although	any	Non-Executive	Director	whose	independence	may	be	called	into	question	is	subject	to	re-election	annually.	

All	of	the	Executive	Directors	are	full-time	employees	of	D4t4	Solutions	plc.

Operation of the Board

The	Board	is	responsible	to	shareholders	for	the	proper	management	of	the	Group.	A	statement	of	the	Directors’	responsibilities	in	respect	

of	the	financial	statements	is	set	out	on	page	55	and	a	statement	of	going	concern	is	given	on	page	52.

The	Board	meets	at	least	once	a	month,	more	often	as	required	for	example	during	the	global	pandemic.	The	formal	schedule	of	matters	

specifically	reserved	to	it	for	decision	was	reviewed	and	adopted	by	the	Board	on	27	May	2021	and	is	reviewed	annually	(see	Group’s	website).

Other	matters	are	delegated	to	the	Executive	Directors,	supported	by	policies	for	reporting	to	the	Board.	Presentations	are	made	to	the	

main	Board	at	each	monthly	meeting	by	the	Executive	Directors	and	also	on	regular	occasions	by	operational	management.

The	Company	Secretary	is	responsible	for	ensuring	that	Board	procedures	are	followed,	and	that	applicable	rules	and	regulations	are	complied	

with	and	for	advising	on	corporate	governance	matters.	The	Group	maintains	appropriate	insurance	cover	in	respect	of	any	legal	action	against	

the	Group’s	Directors	and	the	Company	Secretary,	but	no	cover	exists	if	a	Director	is	found	to	have	acted	fraudulently	or	dishonestly.	

The	Non-Executive	Chairman	and	Non-Executive	Directors	are	able	to	meet	without	Executives	present	prior	to	each	Board	meeting.	The	

agenda	and	relevant	briefing	papers	are	distributed	in	advance	of	each	Board	meeting.

When	Directors	have	concerns	which	cannot	be	resolved	about	the	running	of	the	Group	or	a	proposed	action,	these	concerns	are	

recorded	in	Board	minutes.	Upon	resignation,	a	Non-Executive	Director	is	asked	to	provide	a	written	statement	to	the	Chairman	for	

circulation	to	the	Board	if	there	are	any	such	concerns.	

Commitment

All	Directors	are	expected	to	attend	the	monthly	meeting	of	the	full	Board,	or	to	make	themselves	available	to	join	the	meeting	by	telephone	

or	online,	and	to	attend	all	meetings	of	any	Committee(s)	of	which	they	are	members.	In	addition,	the	Directors	are	expected	to	attend	

strategy	and	business	planning	meetings	each	year.	The	Non-Executive	Directors	are	expected	to	make	themselves	available	at	all	

reasonable	times	for	consultation	by	other	members	of	the	Board.

Prior	to	each	monthly	Board	meeting	the	Directors	receive	a	detailed	pack	which	includes:		

	z Board	meeting	agenda
	z Minutes	from	previous	Board	meeting
	z Board	pack	which	includes	financial	summary,	update	on	each	part	of	the	business,	strategy	execution	update	and	risk	assessment	update
	z Papers	as	required	for	additional	items	requiring	Board	attention 

39

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceMeetings and attendance

The	following	table	summarises	the	number	of	Board,	Audit	Committee,	Nomination	Committee	and	Remuneration	Committee	meetings	

held	during	the	period	covered	by	the	2021	Annual	Report	and	the	attendance	record	of	individual	Directors	at	those	meetings:

MG	Boxall	(resigned 30 June 2021)

M	Biddulph

JL	Dodkins	(resigned 30 June 2021)

CC	Irvine	(resigned 28 April 2021)

PJ	Kear

J	Lythall	(resigned 31 March 2021)

PA	Simmonds

PF	Whiting

Non-statutory director attendance

CC	Irvine

GL	(Bill)	Bruno

N	Patel	(appointed interim CFO 2 March 2021)

Board

15/15

15/15

15/15

15/15

15/15

15/15

15/15

15/15

2/2

1/1

1/1

Audit

Remuneration

Nomination

-

3/3

-

3/3

3/3

-

3/3

3/3

-

-

-

-

3/3

-

-

3/3

3/3

3/3

3/3

-

-

-

-

9/9

-

-

9/9

-

9/9

9/9

-

-

-

The	Board	met	monthly	as	in	prior	years	but	also	had	additional	ad-hoc	meetings	to	discuss,	amongst	other	matters,	the	global	pandemic	

and	consider	what	actions	the	business	should	take	to	ensure	its	employees	were	as	protected	as	possible	whilst	continuing	to	execute	the	

business	strategy.	

Principle 6 – Ensure that between them the Directors have the necessary up-to-date experience, skills and capabilities

The	2021	Annual	Report	includes,	at	pages	32	to	33,	particulars	of	the	current	Board	of	Directors.

It	is	Board	policy	that	Executive	Directors	receive	suitable	ongoing	training	for	their	position,	which	is	considered	as	part	of	the	appraisal	

process.		All	Directors	are	expected	to	keep	their	skills	up	to	date,	for	example	the	CFO	attends	a	number	of	seminars	through	the	year	to	

keep	abreast	of	the	latest	accounting	and	tax	regulations.

The	Chairman	ensures	that	all	Directors	update	their	skills	and	knowledge	required	to	fulfil	their	roles	on	the	Board	and	Committees.	

Ongoing	training	is	provided	as	necessary	and	includes	updates	from	the	Company	Secretary	and	Nominated	Adviser	on	changes	to	the	AIM	

rules,	requirements	under	the	Companies	Act	and	other	regulatory	matters.	Directors	may	consult	with	the	Company	Secretary	or	Nominated	

Adviser	at	any	time	on	matters	related	to	their	role	on	the	Board.	More	detail	on	the	experience	and	capability	of	the	Directors	is	included	in	

their	biographies	on	pages	32	to	33	of	the	2021	Annual	Report	and	also	on	the	Group’s	website.

External Advice

No	significant	matters	of	a	corporate	governance	nature	arose	during	the	period	covered	by	the	2021	Annual	Report	nor	subsequently	to	the	

date	of	this	statement	on	which	it	was	considered	necessary	for	the	Board	or	any	of	its	committees	to	seek	external	advice.		That	said,	the	

Board	consults	with	its	Nominated	Adviser	and	other	professional	advisers	on	routine	matters	arising	in	the	ordinary	course	of	its	business,	

for	example	a	remuneration	consultancy	was	engaged	to	advice	on	the	implementation	of	the	executive	LTIP	scheme.

40

 
Principle 7 – Evaluate Board performance based on clear and 
relevant objectives, seeking continuous improvement

Principle 8 – Promote a corporate culture that is based on ethical 
values and behaviours

The	Board	annually	reviews	the	effectiveness	of	itself,	its	

Our	long-term	growth	strategy	incorporates	our	objectives	and	the	

Committees	and	the	individual	Directors	in	the	following	manner:

business	model	set	out	in	the	strategic	report.	It	is	also	underpinned	

(i)	 The	role	of	the	Committees	is	considered	by	the	Executive	 

Directors	without	the	presence	of	the	Non-Executive	Directors.

(ii)	 The	Chairman	and	CEO	examine	the	contribution	and	 

effectiveness	of	the	individual	Directors	with	regard	to	their	line	 

role	and	contribution	at	Board	meetings.

(iii)	 The	whole	Board	examines	its	purpose	and	effectiveness	with	 

regard	to	identified	key	areas.

(iv)	 The	whole	Board	considers	its	structure,	size	and	 

composition	with	particular	regard	to	the	skills,	knowledge	 

and	experience	of	its	members	and	otherwise	as	advised	by 	 

the	Nomination	Committee.

In	addition,	a	formal	Board	effectiveness	evaluation	process	is	

conducted	biannually.	The	process	involves	all	Directors	completing	

a	detailed	individual	evaluation	of	Board	performance,	which	covers	

effectiveness	in	several	areas	including	Board	composition,	Board	

information,	Board	process,	internal	control	and	risk	management,	

Board	accountability,	CEO/Senior	management	and	Standards	of	

conduct.	

The	results	of	these	biennial	evaluations	are	interpreted	by	an	

independent	Non-Executive	Director,	with	support	from	the	

Chairman,	and	outputs	plus	any	associated	recommendations	are	

by	our	core	values,	which	were	redefined	following	a	staff	consultation	

process	and	are	split	between	client	and	internal	values.

Values
Innovation 
D4t4	Solutions	is	dedicated	to	the	development	of	innovative	

technology	that	provides	insight	into	your	business,	drives	value	

from	your	data	and	pragmatically	addresses	your	challenges.

Security 
D4t4	Solutions’	advanced	technology	collects,	manages	and	

enables	analysis	of	your	data,	supporting	it	with	the	utmost	care	for	

its	security.

Trust 
D4t4	Solutions	takes	pride	in	its	relationships	with	clients,	working	

hard	to	understand	your	business	needs	and	developing	trust	

through	professional	and	responsive	service	provision.

Collaboration 
D4t4	Solutions	augments	its	own	technology	by	collaborating	with	

industry	partners	that	provide	further	opportunities	for	engendering	

the	long-term	success	of	your	operation.

Pride 
D4t4	Solutions	will	be	a	Group	in	which	we	can	be	proud	of	our	

reviewed	by	the	Board	as	a	whole,	with	progress	on	any	actions	

achievements,	delivering	the	highest	standards	of	quality	and	being	

arising	monitored	at	the	monthly	Board	meetings.	

confident	in	our	ability	to	satisfy	our	clients’	needs.

The	results	of	the	last	evaluation,	carried	out	during	early	2020,	

were	interpreted	by	M	Biddulph	and	presented	to	the	Board	at	the	

meeting	held	in	April	2020.	Improvements	in	a	number	of	areas	

were	noted,	for	example	board	composition	and	size,	and	risk	

management.	Areas	were	identified	for	action	or	closer	monitoring,	

with	a	focus	on	succession	planning	and	long-term	strategy.

Recognition 
D4t4	Solutions	will	acknowledge	the	value	of	all	employees	and	

recognise	their	contribution	to	the	Group’s	ongoing	success.

Teamwork 
D4t4	Solutions	will	create	an	environment	of	innovation	in	which	

we	work	together	as	a	team	to	develop	pioneering	technology	that	

As	the	business	expands	and	as	part	of	succession	planning,	the	

solves	our	clients’	challenges.

Executive	Directors	have	been	challenged	to	identify	potential	

internal	candidates	who	could	potentially	occupy	Board	positions	

and	set	out	development	plans	for	these	individuals	and	these	are	in	

progress.

Engagement 
D4t4	Solutions	will	be	a	workplace	in	which	all	employees	are	

engaged	with	our	business	and	are	empowered	to	get	involved	with	

our	communications	and	decision-	making	processes.

41

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
The	culture	of	the	Group	is	characterised	by	these	values	which	are	

Non-Executive	Directors	constructively	challenge	and	assist	in	

communicated	regularly	to	staff	through	internal	communications	

the	development	of	strategy.	They	scrutinise	the	performance	of	

and	forums.	These	core	values	are	also	communicated	to	

management	in	meeting	agreed	goals	and	objectives	and	monitor	

prospective	employees	in	the	Group’s	recruitment	programmes	and	

the	reporting	of	performance.

are	further	embedded	within	the	induction	process.

The	Board	has	not	appointed	a	Senior	Independent	Non-Executive	

The	Board	believes	that	a	culture	that	is	based	on	the	core	values	

Director.

is	a	competitive	advantage	and	consistent	with	fulfilment	of	the	

Group’s	mission	and	execution	of	its	strategy.

The	Company	Secretary	is	J	Thorne,	a	solicitor	of	over	25	years	

standing,	who	was	appointed	to	the	role	on	27	July	2017.	He	is	not	

The	Board	has	a	high	proportion	of	Executive	Director	

a	Director	of	the	Group.

representation	which	means	communication	and	feedback	between	

the	business	and	the	Board	is	very	well	established.	Recognition	

and	respect	of	appropriately	ethical	values	and	behaviours	within	

the	organisation	is	therefore	both	well	monitored	and	promoted.	

Engagement	between	the	Board	and	the	organisation	via	these	

To	deal	with	specific	aspects	of	the	Group’s	affairs,	the	Board	has	

formed	certain	Committees.	Each	of	these	Committees	is	governed	

by	terms	of	reference	available	upon	request	from	the	Company	

Secretary.

Executive	Directors	is	therefore	deemed	to	be	all-inclusive.

Details	of	the	membership,	roles,	responsibilities	and	activities	of	

Ethical business practices

the	Audit,	Remuneration	and	Nomination	Committees	are	described	

in	more	detail	in	the	individual	Committee	reports	commencing	on	

The	Group	is	committed	to	corporate	sustainability	and	to	applying	

page	44	of	the	2021	Annual	Report.	The	Chair	of	each	Committee	

the	highest	standards	of	ethical	conduct	and	integrity	to	its	

reports	to	the	Board	on	the	activities	of	that	Committee.

business	activities	in	the	UK	and	overseas.	The	Group	does	not	

tolerate	any	form	of	bribery:	the	Directors	and	senior	management	

are	committed	to	implementing	and	enforcing	effective	systems	

throughout	the	organisation	to	prevent	bribery	in	accordance	with	its	

obligations	under	the	Bribery	Act	2010.

Principle 9 – Maintain governance structures and processes that are 
fit for purpose and support good decision-making by the Board

Roles and Responsibilities of Directors

The	2021	Annual	Report	includes,	at	pages	32	to	33,	descriptions	

of	the	individual	roles	and	responsibilities	of	the	Chairman,	Chief	

Executive	Officer	and	other	Directors.

The Board and its Committees composition

The	Board	is	currently	comprised	of	the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	

one	Executive	Director	and	a	further	two	Non-Executive	Directors.	

From	the	1st	of	July	2021	the	Board	of	D4t4	will	consist	of	the	Chief	

Executive	Officer,	the	Non-Executive	Chairman,	two	Non-Executive	

Directors	and	(upon	making	a	permanent	appointment)	the	Chief	

Financial	Officer.	

The	terms	of	reference	for	each	of	the	Audit,	Remuneration,	

Nomination	can	be	found	in	the	Annual	Report	on	pages	44	to	46	

and	on	the	Group’s	website.

Evolution of governance framework

In	March	2018	the	QCA	Code	was	formally	selected	as	the	

appropriate	recognised	corporate	governance	code	to	be	applied	for	

the	purposes	of	AIM	Rule	26.	The	Board	monitors	the	requirements	

of	this	code	on	an	annual	basis	and	revise	its	governance	framework	

as	appropriate	as	the	Group	evolves.

As	part	of	ongoing	governance	efforts,	the	Group	decided	this	

year	that	an	additional	sub-committee	should	be	formed	to	focus	

on	ESG	(environmental,	social	&	governance).	This	committee	is	

comprised	mainly	of	staff	members	who	volunteered	for	the	role	

due	to	a	particular	interest	in	driving	the	Group’s	ESG	agenda.		In	

March	2021,	the	first	sitting	of	this	ESG	Committee	took	place.	

The	Committee	was	predominantly	formed	to	focus	on	the	Group’s	

environmental	and	social	initiatives,	as	governance	is	clearly	a	focus	

of	the	whole	Board	and	all	committees.

The	roles	of	Chairman	and	Chief	Executive	Officer	are	distinct,	set	

out	in	writing	and	agreed	by	the	Board.	The	Chairman	is	responsible	

for	the	effectiveness	of	the	Board	and	ensuring	communication	with	

shareholders,	and	the	Chief	Executive	Officer	is	accountable	for	the	

management	of	the	Group.

As	the	Group	continues	to	grow	the	Board	fully	recognises	both	the	

importance	and	the	need	of	the	governance	framework	to	continue	

to	evolve.		This	has	been	evidenced	over	the	last	two	years	by	the	

formation	of	the	Risk	and	ESG	sub-committees	and	the	external	

advice	sought	regarding	the	new	executive	LTIP	scheme.

42

Principle 10 – Communicate how the Group is governed and is performing by maintaining a dialogue with shareholders and other relevant 
stakeholders

A	range	of	forums	exist	at	which	the	functioning	of	the	Group	is	critically	appraised	and	where	opportunities	exist	for	stakeholders	to	

challenge	management	and	hold	them	to	account	for	the	Group’s	performance.

Board Committees

A	description	of	the	work	of	the	Board’s	Committees	in	the	financial	year	to	31	March	2021,	including	a	report	from	each	of	the	Audit,	

Remuneration	and	Nomination	Committees,	is	set	out	at	pages	44	to	46	of	the	2021	Annual	Report.

The	work	of	the	Nomination	Committee	resulted	in	the	appointment	on	4	March	2021	of	Nitil	Patel	as	interim	CFO.	

Votes at General Meetings

All	resolutions	put	to	the	AGM	held	on	6	August	2020	were	passed	by	majorities	of	not	less	than	90%	of	the	votes	cast.

The	most	recent	results	for	the	Group,	together	with	Annual	Reports	for	the	preceding	years	and	notices	of	all	General	Meetings,	can	be	

found	on	the	Group’s	website.

43

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceAudit Committee report

The	two	main	issues	that	the	Audit	Committee	are	concerned	with	

are	in	relation	to	revenue	recognition	and	the	carrying	value	of	

goodwill.	The	Committee	review	the	Group’s	revenue	recognition	

policies	to	ensure	they	are	compliant	with	current	accounting	

standards.	In	addition,	the	Committee	monitors	the	intangible	

carrying	value	in	the	Group	for	any	indications	of	impairment.

Auditor Independence

To	ensure	auditor	independence,	consideration	is	given	to	their	

integrity	and	the	objective	approach	of	the	audit	process.	The	

use	of	non-audit	services	is	not	considered	to	be	significant	and	

amounts	paid	in	respect	of	these	are	disclosed	in	note	6.

I	am	satisfied	that	the	Committee	has	satisfactorily	discharged	its	

duties	in	the	year	in	accordance	with	its	terms	of	reference,	which	

are	reviewed	annually.

Peter	Simmonds
Chair of the Audit Committee
28 July 2021

Audit Committee membership
	z Peter	Simmonds	(Chair)

	z Monica	Biddulph

	z Peter	Whiting

Dear Shareholder

I	am	pleased	to	present	the	report	of	the	Audit	Committee	for	the	

year	ended	31	March	2021.

The	Audit	Committee	comprises	three	Non-Executive	Directors	

of	the	Company,	all	of	whom	served	for	the	entirety	of	the	year.	

The	Committee	is	chaired	by	myself	and	met	thrice	during	the	

year	under	review.	It	operates	under	formal	terms	of	reference,	

which	are	available	on	request	from	the	Company	Secretary	or	at	

the	AGM.	The	Committee	provides	a	forum	for	reporting	by	the	

Group’s	auditors.	By	invitation,	the	meetings	are	also	attended	by	

the	CEO	and	CFO	of	the	Company.

The	Audit	Committee	is	responsible	for	reviewing	a	wide	range	of	

financial	matters	including	ensuring	that	the	financial	performance	

of	the	Group	is	adequately	measured	and	controlled,	correctly	

represented,	reported	to	and	understood	by	the	Board.	The	Audit	

Committee	advises	the	Board	on	the	appointment	of	external	

auditors	and	on	their	remuneration,	both	for	audit	and	non-audit	

work,	and	discusses	the	nature	and	scope	of	their	audit.

The	Audit	Committee	meets	the	auditors	at	least	once	a	year	

without	any	Executive	Directors	present.

The	Audit	Committee	includes	one	financially	qualified	member	as	

recognised	by	the	Consultative	Committee	of	Accountancy	Bodies.	

All	Audit	Committee	members	are	expected	to	be	financially	literate.	

Following	the	above,	the	Audit	Committee	has	recommended	to	the	

Board	that	RSM	UK	Audit	LLP	is	re-appointed.

44

 
 
Nomination Committee report

Nomination Committee membership
	z Monika	Biddulph	(Chair)

	z Peter	Kear	(CEO)

	z Peter	Simmonds

	z Peter	Whiting

Dear Shareholder

I	am	pleased	to	present	the	report	of	the	Nomination	Committee	

for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021.	

The	Nomination	Committee	comprises	four	Directors:	three	Non-

Executives	Directors	(myself,	Peter	Simmonds	and	Peter	Whiting)	

and	one	Executive	Director,	Peter	Kear.	In	the	performance	of	its	

duties,	the	Committee	held	nine	meetings	in	the	year.	The	principal	

activity	of	the	Nomination	Committee	in	the	year	was	succession	

months	will	ensure	a	smooth	transition	and	give	Bill	the	best	

possible	launchpad	into	the	role.

In	addition	to	the	CEO	succession,	the	Nomination	Committee	also	

took	an	active	role	in	the	appointment	of	the	interim	CFO,	following	

Charles	Irvine’s	decision	to	leave	the	Group	to	pursue	another	

opportunity	outside	of	the	public	markets,	and	in	the	appointment	

of	the	CFO.

I	would	also	like	to	thank	John	Lythall,	who	decided	to	step	

down	from	the	Board	at	the	end	of	March	2021	to	retire,	for	his	

dedication	and	significant	contributions	to	the	success	of	the	

company	over	many	years.

Following	on	from	John’s	retirement	as	a	Non-Executive	

Director,	the	Nomination	Committee	will	further	consider	the	

Board	composition	and	the	balance	between	Non-Executive	

and	Executive	Directors	as	well	as	the	mix	of	skills	amongst	the	

independent	Non-Executive	Directors	and	decide	on	appropriate	

actions	to	be	taken.

planning,	and	the	appointment	of	a	CEO	successor.

The	Board’s	policy	is	to	ensure	that	all	appointments	are	merit-

In	2020	Peter	Kear	informed	the	Board	that	he	would	like	to	 

plan	his	retirement	with	a	view	of	stepping	down	as	CEO	in	a	1	to	

2	year	timeframe.	The	Nomination	Committee	set	out	a	plan	and	

timeline	to	appoint	a	successor	to	the	CEO.

based	and	based	on	clear	and	objective	criteria,	giving	due	regard	

to	equality	of	opportunity,	and	to	promote	inclusion	and	diversity.	

The	Board	notes	that	achieving	diversity	in	the	technology	sector	is	

challenging,	having	regard	to	the	available	pool	of	individuals	with	

the	right	skills,	experience	and	talent.	Given	the	size	of	the	Board	

After	thorough	discussions	with	a	number	of	executive	search	

and	the	Group,	the	Nomination	Committee	does	not	currently	set	

agencies,	a	specialist	recruiter	was	selected	to	work	with	D4t4	on	

any	measurable	objectives	for	implementing	a	diversity	policy,	but	it	

the	CEO	search.	A	detailed	job	specification	together	with	a	list	of	

acknowledges	the	role	of	the	Board	in	promoting	diversity,	including	

key	criteria	helped	generate	a	diverse	long	list,	from	which	a	short	

gender	diversity,	throughout	the	Group.	Currently	there	is	one	female	

list	of	candidates	was	selected.	The	process	included	a	merit-

member	of	the	Board,	representing	25%	of	Board	membership.

based	assessment	based	on	objective	criteria,	having	regard	to 	

the	Group’s	current	and	future	requirements.

In	relation	to	succession	planning,	the	Nomination	Committee	

keeps	under	review,	and	takes	appropriate	action	to	ensure,	

Following	a	thorough	interview	process	and	deliberations,	the	

orderly	succession	for	appointments	to	the	Board	and	to	senior	

Nomination	Committee	recommended	to	the	Board,	and	the	Board	

management,	thereby	maintaining	an	appropriate	balance	of	skills	

decided,	to	appoint	Bill	Bruno	as	CEO-designate/Deputy	CEO.	Bill	

and	experience	within	the	Group	and	on	the	Board.	With	regards	

will	work	alongside	Peter	during	the	next	six	to	twelve	months,	

to	Non-Executive	Directors,	the	Committee	considers,	amongst	

then	planning	to	transition	to	the	role	of	CEO.

other	factors,	their	other	significant	outside	commitments	prior	to	

Myself,	the	Nomination	Committee	and	the	Board	are	very	

pleased	with	the	outcome	and	look	forward	to	working	with	Bill	

in	the	future.	Bill	brings	passion,	insight	and	a	wealth	of	industry	

making	recommendations.	This	is	designed	to	ensure	that	they	

have	sufficient	time	to	meet	what	is	expected	of	them	and	keeps	

any	changes	to	these	commitments	under	review.

knowledge,	he	is	well	known	in	our	industry	and	has	a	big	

I	am	satisfied	that	the	Nomination	Committee	has	satisfactorily	

following	amongst	clients	and	staff.	I	am	confident	that	under	Bill’s	

discharged	its	duties	in	the	year	in	accordance	with	its	terms	of	

leadership	the	business	will	continue	to	thrive	and	develop	a	host	

reference,	which	are	reviewed	on	an	annual	basis.

of	new	global	opportunities.

I	would	like	to	thank	Peter	Kear	for	his	proactive	involvement	in	

finding	his	successor.	Peter	is	a	hard	act	to	follow,	and	I	have	

every	confidence	that	his	support	and	mentoring	over	the	coming	

Monika	Biddulph
Chair of the Nomination Committee
28 July 2021

45

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance 
Remuneration Committee report

Remuneration Committee membership
	z Peter	Whiting	(Chair)

	z Monica	Biddulph

	z Peter	Simmonds

on	performance,	designed	to	align	executive	pay	with	shareholder	

interests.	In	this	respect,	the	Committee	has	assessed	the	

performance	of	Executive	Directors	for	the	year	reported	against	

the	targets	set	a	year	ago,	set	performance	targets	for	the	

following	financial	year	and	made	recommendations	to	the	Board	

on	the	overall	packages	for	the	Executive	Directors.

Following	the	shareholder	approval	granted	at	our	2019	AGM,	we	

made	our	first	grants	under	the	Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	(LTIP)	in	

August	2020.	Providing	further	alignment	with	wider	shareholder	

experience,	these	will	vest	three	years	after	grant,	subject	to	the	

satisfaction	of	performance	criteria	based	on	Total	Shareholder	

Dear Shareholder

I	am	pleased	to	introduce	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	for	

Return	(TSR)	and	growth	in	EPS	over	that	period.	

the	year	ended	31	March	2021.

I	am	satisfied	that	the	Committee	has	appropriately	discharged	

The	Committee	has	consisted	throughout	the	entire	year	of	four	

its	duties	in	the	year	in	accordance	with	its	responsibilities	and	

Non-Executive	Directors;	Peter	Simmonds,	John	Lythall,	Monika	

encourage	you	to	read	the	Directors	Remuneration	Report	on	the	

Biddulph	and	me	as	Chair.	John	stepped	down	from	both	the	

following	pages.

Board	and	the	Remuneration	Committee	on	31	March	2021.		

Peter	Whiting
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
28 July 2021

The	Committee’s	terms	of	reference	require	it	to	meet	not	less	than	

once	each	year.	The	Committee	met	three	times	in	the	year	ended	

31	March	2021.	It	is	responsible	for	reviewing	and	determining	the	

policy	of	the	Group	on	executive	remuneration	including	specific	

remuneration	packages	for	each	of	the	Executive	members	of	

the	Board,	pension	rights	and	compensation	payments.	The	

Committee	is	also	responsible	for	monitoring	compliance	with	the	

implementation	by	the	Group	of	the	legal	requirements	and,	so	far	

as	reasonably	practical,	recommendations	and	guidelines	relating	

to	Directors’	remuneration.

None	of	the	Committee	has	any	personal	financial	interest	

(other	than	as	shareholders	or	as	noted	in	the	Directors’	report),	

conflicts	of	interests	arising	from	cross-	directorships	or	day-to-

day	involvement	in	running	the	business.	The	Committee	makes	

recommendations	to	the	Board.	No	Director	plays	any	part	in	any	

discussion	about	his	or	her	own	remuneration.

For	2020/2021,	the	Remuneration	Committee	has	continued	to	

operate	a	simple	remuneration	structure	made	up	of	basic	salary,	

pensions	and	benefits,	annual	performance-related	bonuses,	

and	share	options.	As	in	prior	years,	a	significant	proportion	of	

executive	remuneration	has	been	based		

46

 
Directors’ Remuneration report

This	report	complies	with	the	requirements	of	the	Large	and	Medium-sized	Companies	and	Groups	(Accounts	and	Reports)	Regulations	

2008	as	amended	in	2013,	the	provisions	of	the	QCA	Corporate	Governance	Code	2018	and	the	Listing	Rules.

The	report	is	in	two	sections:

	z The	Directors	remuneration	policy	which	sets	out	the	Group’s	current	policy	on	remuneration	for	Executive	and	Non-Executive	 
	 Directors;	and
	z The	Directors’	Remuneration	Report.	This	section	sets	out	details	of	how	the	remuneration	policy	was	implemented	for	the	year	ended	 

31	March	2021. 

Directors’ remuneration policy

Executive	remuneration	packages	are	prudently	designed	to	attract,	motivate	and	retain	Directors	of	the	high	calibre	needed	to	maintain	

the	Company’s	position	as	a	market	leader	and	to	reward	them	for	enhancing	value	to	shareholders.	The	performance	measurement	of	the	

Executive	Directors	and	key	members	of	senior	management,	and	the	determination	of	their	annual	remuneration	package	are	undertaken	

by	the	Committee.	The	remuneration	of	the	Non-Executive	Directors	is	determined	by	the	Board	within	limits	set	out	in	the	Articles	of	

Association.

The	Company’s	policy	is	that	a	substantial	proportion	of	the	potential	remuneration	of	the	Executive	Directors	should	be	performance	

related.	The	performance	criteria	set	should	motivate	the	Executive	Directors	to	create	value	for	the	shareholders.

There	are	five	main	elements	of	the	remuneration	package	for	Executive	Directors	and	senior	management:

Element	of	remuneration

Link	to	Group	strategy

Operation

Framework

Base salary

Ensures	that	the	Company	

Base	salary	is	paid	monthly	

An	Executive	Director’s	salary	is	determined	by	

can recruit and retain 

and	reviewed	annually,	with	

the	Remuneration	Committee	in	March	of	each	

high-quality	Executives	to	

any	increases	applying	from	

year	and	when	an	individual	changes	position	

deliver	on	the	Company	

1	April.

or	responsibility.	In	deciding	appropriate	levels,	

strategy	in	the	interest	of	

the	shareholders.

the	Remuneration	Committee	considers	the	

Company	as	a	whole	and	relies	on	objective	

research	which	gives	up	to	date	information	on	a	

comparable	group	of	companies.

Benefits

Ensures	that	the	Company	

Benefits	principally	 

In	relation	to	health	care	and	death	in	service	

can recruit and retain 

comprise	private	healthcare	

benefits,	premiums	are	paid	by	the	Company	

high-quality	Executives	to	

and death in service 

to	an	external	broker	to	arrange	cover,	in	line	

deliver	on	the	Company	

insurance.	In	addition,	one	

with	other	Group	employees.	These	benefits	are	

strategy	in	the	interest	of	

Executive	Directors	receive	

standard	for	all	Group	employees.

the	shareholders.

company	car.

The	Company	offers	company	cars	/	car	

allowances	to	a	number	of	employees	across	the	

organisation.

Annual bonus

Rewards	and	incentivises	

The	Committee	sets	annual	

The	Remuneration	Committee	sets	bonus	plans	

the	Executive	Directors	 

performance	targets,	linked	

for	Executive	Directors	based	upon	achieving	a	

for	achievement	of	

to	strategic	objectives	 

number	of	pre-defined	growth	targets	including	

strategic	objectives.

and	risk	management.	

revenue	and	EPS.	

Bonus	payments	in	respect	

of	a	year	are	made	in	June,	

or	later	if	any	element	is	

deferred.

47

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance	
Element	of	remuneration

Link	to	Group	strategy

Operation

Framework

Share option plan

Aligns	the	interests	of	the	

The	Remuneration	

The	share	option	plans	are	subject	to	rules	

Executive	Directors	with	

Committee	has	discretion	

and	limits	approved	by	shareholders	in	general	

the	interest	of	the	long	

to	make	option	grants	

meeting.	Options	are	granted	at	an	exercise	

term	shareholders	as	the	

to	Executive	Directors	

price	based	on	the	mid-market	price	of	ordinary	

options	only	deliver	value	if	

and	other	staff,	subject	

shares	on	the	day	prior	to	the	date	of	grant.	Any	

the	share	price	rises.

to	the	scheme	rules,	and	

exercise	is	subject	to	satisfaction	of	the	specified	

to	determine	appropriate	

performance	conditions	defined.

performance	conditions.

Pension

Ensures	that	the	Company	

Pension	contributions	are	

Executive	Directors	are	members	of	the	

can recruit and retain 

made	by	the	Company	to	a	

Company	Money	Purchase	pension	scheme.

high-quality	Executives	

defined	contribution	scheme	

to	deliver	on	the	Group	

operated	by	third	party	

strategy	in	the	interest	of	

providers.

the	shareholders.

To	the	extent	that	contributions	to	the	Company	

scheme	are	restricted	by	HMRC	limits,	the	

Company	contributes	6%	of	the	Director’s	salary	

providing	the	Director	contributes	a	minimum	

of	4%	of	their	salary	by	way	of	salary	sacrifice.	

There	are	no	unfunded	pension	promises	or	

similar	arrangements	for	Directors.	There	were	4	

Directors	in	the	scheme	in	2021	(2020:	3).

Chairman and Non- 

Ensures	that	the	Group	

Fees	for	Non-Executive	

A	basic	fee	is	set	for	normal	duties,	

Executive Director fees

can recruit and retain a 

Directors	are	set	by	the	

commensurate	with	fees	paid	for	similar	roles	

high-quality	Chairman	and	

Board	(excluding	Non-	

in	other	similar	companies,	taking	account	of	

Non-Executive	Directors	

Executive	Directors).	Fees	

the	time	commitment,	responsibilities,	and	

to	deliver	on	the	Group	

are	paid	monthly	or	quarterly.

committee	position(s).	Supplementary	fees	

strategy	in	the	interest	of	

the	shareholders.

are	paid	for	any	additional	duties	at	fixed	day	

rates.	Non-Executive	Directors	are	not	eligible	

for	pensions,	incentives,	bonus	or	any	similar	

payments	other	than	normal	out-of-pocket	

expenses	incurred	on	behalf	of	the	business.

Compensation	for	loss	of	office	is	not	payable	to	

Non-Executive	Directors.

Remuneration policy considerations

Recruitment

The Company’s Nomination Committee is responsible for leading the process for Board appointments and making recommendations 

to the Board. Refer to the report of the Nomination Committee for details.

Loss of office payments

In the event of early termination, all of the Directors contracts provide for compensation up to a maximum of basic salary plus benefits 

for the notice period.

Wider staff employment conditions

The Remuneration Committee considers pay and employment conditions for other senior Executives and staff members of the Group 

when designing and setting Executive remuneration. Underpinning all pay is an intention to be fair to all staff of the Group, taking into 

account the individual’s seniority and local market practices.

48

Consultation with shareholders

The Remuneration Committee is committed to an ongoing dialogue with shareholders and seeks the views of significant shareholders 

when any major changes are being made to remuneration arrangements. The Committee takes into account the views of significant 

shareholders when formulating and implementing the policy.

Consultation with employees

The Board and the Remuneration Committee did not consult with employees when formulating and implementing the policy.

Service contracts and letters of appointment

It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors should have contracts with an indefinite term providing for a maximum of one 

year’s notice.

Executive Directors

P Kear and J Dodkins have Directors’ service agreements which can be terminated on twelve months’ notice. These agreements were 

dated 29 August 1997. M Boxall has a service agreement which can be terminated on 3 months’ notice dated 1 November 2015.

Non-Executive Directors

P Simmonds, P Whiting and M Biddulph each have an agreement for 12 months. The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are 

determined and confirmed by the full Board excluding (in each case) the Non-Executive Director concerned.

Policy on Director shareholdings

The Company has no policy on Director shareholdings.

Outside appointments

Executive Directors are entitled to accept appointments outside the Company providing that the Chairman’s permission is sought and 

fees in excess of £20,000 from all such appointments are accounted for to the Company.

Aggregate Directors’ remuneration

The total amounts for Directors’ remuneration were as follows:

		Emoluments	(Fees	/	basic	salary,	benefits	and	annual	bonus)	

		Money	purchase	pension	contributions	

		IFRS	2	share-based	payment	charge	

	Employer’s	National	Insurance	

	Total	

2021	

£000	

1,352	

39	

194	

1,585	

183	

1,768	

2020	

£000

1,207

38

66

1,311

157

	1,468

One	director	(2020:	three)	exercised	166,667	options	during	the	year	(2020:	766,667)	with	gains	on	exercise	of	share	options	during	the	year	

totalling	£227k	(2020:	£1,184k).

49

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
Single figure for the total remuneration (audited)

Fees/basic	
salary 
£000	

Benefits		

Bonus	

Sub	total	

Pension	

£000	

£000	

£000	

£000	

31	March	2021	

  Executives 

		P	Kear	

		J	Dodkins (resigned 30 June 2021)	

		M	Boxall (resigned 30 June 2021)	

		C	Irvine	(resigned 28 April 2021)	

  C Warren (resigned 4 July 2019) 

		M	Tod (resigned 30 Sept 2019) 
  Non-Executives 

		P	Simmonds	

		J	Lythall  (resigned 31 March 2021)	

		P	Whiting	

		M	Biddulph	
  Total 

214	

163	

184	

129	

-	

-	

50	

20	

45	

40	

845 

27	

14	

3	

9	

-	

-	

-	

5	

-	

-	

171	

131	

147	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

412	

308	

334	

138	

-	

-	

50	

25	

45	

40	

10	

10	

11	

8	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

Total	
2021	
£000 

422	
318 

345 

146	
- 

- 

50 

25 

45 

40 

Total
2020
£000

385

279

284

-

68

94

50

27

45

13

58 

449 

1,352 

39 

1,391 

1,245

Remuneration of highest paid Director

Remuneration	

Company	contributions	to	money	purchase	pension	schemes	

2021	

412	

10	

422 

2020

375

10

385

Emoluments	for	the	highest	paid	Director	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	and	31	March	2020	are	included	in	the	table	above.

The	highest	paid	Director	exercised	no	share	options	during	the	year	(2020:	nil	options	exercised).

Directors share options

Aggregate	emoluments	disclosed	above	do	not	include	any	amounts	for	the	value	of	options	to	acquire	ordinary	shares	in	the	Company	

granted	to	or	held	by	the	Directors.

Details	of	options	for	Directors	who	served	during	the	year	are	as	follows:

Number at 

Number at 

 P	Kear	

	J	Dodkins	

	M	Boxall	

31	March	2020	

31	March	2021	

Option	price	

Expiry	date	

Exercisable	from

-	

-	

-	

166,667	

166,666	

138,591	

105,593	

118,792	

-	

166,666	

2.0p	

2.0p	

2.0p	

149.0p	

149.0p	

10	Aug	2030	

10	Aug	2030	

10	Aug	2030	

13	Aug	2028	

13	Aug	2028	

10	Aug	2023

10	Aug	2023

10	Aug	2023 

1	Jul	2020

1	Jul	2021

P	Simmonds,	C	Irvine,	J	Lythall,	P	Whiting	and	M	Biddulph	did	not	hold	any	share	options	during	the	year.

All	reductions	in	options	held	by	Directors	between	31	March	2020	and	31	March	2021	have	arisen	due	to	the	exercising	of	options	held	at	

31	March	2020	and	were	all	exercised	whilst	in	office.	No	options	lapsed.

50

	
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
		
	
		
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
One	director	(2020:	three)	exercised	166,667	options	during	the	year	(2020:	766,667)	with	gains	on	exercise	of	share	options	during	the	year	

totalling	£227k	(2020:	£1,184k).

The	market	price	of	the	shares	at	31	March	2021	was	302.5p	(140.0p	at	31	March	2020)	and	the	range	in	the	period	under	review	was	

131.0p	to	320.0p.

There	have	been	no	variations	to	the	terms	and	conditions	or	performance	criteria	for	share	options	during	the	financial	year.	As	the	share	

options	have	been	issued	on	different	dates,	they	have	different	performance	criteria	attached.	However,	these	performance	criteria	are	in	

line	with	increasing	Earnings	Per	Share.

Directors	shareholdings	and	dividends	paid	to	Directors	are	disclosed	in	the	Directors’	Report	on	page	53.

Advisers

The	Committee	receives	independent	advice	from	FIT	Remuneration	Consultants	LLP	when	required.

Performance graphs

Company share price

600

400

200

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

(INDEX) D4t4 Solutions plc - Price

(INDEX) FTSE AIM - Price

(INDEX) FTSE Small Cap - Price

The	graph	below	shows	the	Company’s	share	price	performance	compared	with	the	performance	of	the	FTSE	AIM	All-Share	and	FTSE	

SmallCap	Index	(GTBP)	for	the	last	six	years.	The	FTSE	Aim	All-Share	and	FTSE	SmallCap	Index	(GBP)	have	been	selected	for	this	

comparison	because	it	is	the	Board	opinion	that	they	give	a	true	comparison	to	its	peers.

Peter	Whiting

Chair of the Remuneration Committee
28 July 2021

51

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate GovernanceDirectors’ report

The	Directors	present	their	annual	report	and	the	audited	financial	

There	are	a	number	of	agreements	that	take	effect,	alter	or	

statements	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021,	which	should	be	

terminate	upon	a	change	of	control	of	the	Company	such	as	

read	in	conjunction	with	the	Strategic	Report	on	pages	12	to	21.	

commercial	contracts,	bank	loan	agreements,	property	lease	

The	Corporate	Governance	Statement	set	out	on	pages	31	to	43	

arrangements	and	employees’	share	plans.

forms	part	of	this	report.

Incorporation

D4t4	Solutions	Plc	is	a	company	incorporated	in	the	United	

Kingdom	under	the	Companies	Act	1985.

Dividends

The	Directors	recommend	a	final	dividend	of	2.0p	(2020:	1.9p)	per	

ordinary	share	to	be	paid	this	year.

Future outlook

The	Group’s	future	outlook	and	opportunities	are	referred	to	in	the	

Chief	Executive	Officer	report	on	page	4.

Capital structure

Details	of	the	authorised	and	issued	share	capital,	together	with	

details	of	the	movements	in	the	Company’s	issued	share	capital	

during	the	year	are	shown	in	note	22.	The	Company	has	one	class	

None	of	these	are	considered	to	be	significant	in	terms	of	

their	likely	impact	on	the	business	of	the	Group	as	a	whole.	

Furthermore,	the	Directors	are	not	aware	of	any	agreements	

between	the	Company	and	its	Directors	or	employees	that	provide	

for	compensation	for	loss	of	office	or	employment	that	occurs	

because	of	a	takeover	bid.

Going Concern

The	Group’s	business	activities,	together	with	the	factors	likely	to	

affect	its	future	development,	performance	and	position	are	set	

out	above	and	the	risks	and	uncertainties	summarised.	The	Group	

and	Company	has	sufficient	financial	resources	to	cover	budgeted	

future	cash-flows	and	has	contracts	in	place	with	customers	and	

suppliers	across	different	geographic	areas	and	industries.	As	a	

consequence	of	these	factors,	the	Directors	believe	that	the	Group	

is	well	placed	to	manage	its	business	risks	successfully.

of	ordinary	shares	which	carry	no	right	to	fixed	income.	Each	share	

Having	reviewed	the	future	plans	and	projections	for	the	business,	

(other	than	own	shares	held	in	treasury)	carries	the	right	to	one	

the	Directors	believe	that	the	Group	and	Company	and	its	

vote	at	general	meetings	of	the	Company.

subsidiary	undertakings	have	adequate	resources	to	continue	in	

There	are	no	specific	restrictions	on	the	size	of	a	holding	nor	on	

the	transfer	of	shares,	which	are	both	governed	by	the	general	

provisions	of	the	Articles	of	Association	and	prevailing	legislation.	

operational	existence	for	the	foreseeable	future.	For	this	reason,	

they	continue	to	adopt	the	going	concern	basis	in	preparing	the	

financial	statements.

The	Directors	are	not	aware	of	any	agreements	between	holders	of	

In	accordance	with	the	Companies	Act	s414	c(11)	information	in	

the	Company’s	shares	that	may	result	in	restrictions	on	the	transfer	

relation	to	the	business	and	risks	is	shown	in	the	Strategic	Report.

Supplier Payment Policy

It	is	Company	policy	to	pay	all	claims	from	suppliers	according	

to	agreed	terms	of	payment	upon	receipt	of	a	valid	invoice	which	

is	materially	correct.	The	Company	does	not	follow	a	code	on	

standard	payment	practice.	At	31	March	2021	the	Company	had	

83	days	(2020:	93	days)	of	outstanding	liabilities	to	creditors.

of	securities	or	on	voting	rights.

Details	of	employee	share	schemes	are	set	out	in	note	27.

No	person	has	any	special	rights	of	control	over	the	Company’s	

share	capital	and	all	issued	shares	are	fully	paid.

With	regard	to	the	appointment	and	replacement	of	Directors,	

the	Company	is	governed	by	its	Articles	of	Association,	the	

Companies	Acts	and	related	legislation.	The	Articles	themselves	

may	be	amended	by	special	resolution	of	the	shareholders.	The	

powers	of	Directors	are	described	in	the	Main	Board	Terms	of	

Reference,	copies	of	which	are	available	on	request,	and	the	

Corporate	Governance	Statement	on	page	34.

Under	its	Articles	of	Association,	the	Company	has	authority	to	

issue	50,000,000	ordinary	shares.

52

Directors and Directors’ Interests

The	Directors	who	held	office	during	the	year	and	to	the	date	of	signing,	unless	otherwise	stated,	were	as	follows:

P	J	Kear 

J	L	Dodkins	(resigned 30 June 2021) 

M	G	Boxall	(resigned 30 June 2021) 

C	C	Irvine (resigned 28 Apr 2021) 

P	A	Simmonds 

J	Lythall	(resigned 31 March 2021) 

P	Whiting 

M	Biddulph	

At	the	AGM,	P	Whiting	will	offer	himself	for	re-appointment	in	accordance	with	the	Articles.

The	Directors	who	held	office	at	the	end	of	the	financial	year	had	the	following	interests	in	the	ordinary	shares	of	the	Company	as	recorded	

in	the	register	of	Directors’	share	and	debenture	interests:

P	J	Kear	

J	L	Dodkins	

M	G	Boxall	

C	C	Irvine		

P	A	Simmonds	

J	Lythall	

P	Whiting	 	

M	Biddulph	

* or date of appointment if later

Interest	at	

Interest	at 

	 31	March	2021	

	31	March	2020*

1,665,752	

690,266	

71,115	

Nil	

346,500	

1,000,000	

22,000	

Nil	

1,665,752

690,266

35,000

Nil

346,500

1,000,000

22,000

Nil

During	the	year	the	Directors	received	dividends	on	their	shares	at	the	same	rate	as	any	other	shareholder.	Details	of	share	options	can	be	

found	on	page	50.

Substantial holdings

As	far	as	the	Directors	are	aware,	as	at	31	May	2021,	the	only	holdings	of	3%	or	more	of	the	Company’s	issued	share	capital	were	the	following:

Canaccord	Genuity	Wealth	Management	

Ennismore	Fund	Management	

Herald	Investment	Management	

Chelverton	Asset	Management	

P	Kear	Esq	

Otus	Capital	Management	

Number	of

	ordinary	shares	

7,362,500		

3,192,043	

2,974,800	

2,125,000	

1,665,752	

1,544,278		

%	

18.30

7.94

7.40

5.28

	4.14

3.84

53

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
Acquisition of the Company’s own shares

Research and Development

At	the	end	of	the	year,	the	Directors	had	authority,	under	the	

The	Group	has	continued	to	attach	a	high	priority	to	research	and	

shareholders’	resolution	of	6	August	2020,	to	purchase	through	the	

development	throughout	the	year	aimed	at	the	development	of	

market	up	to	4,023,342	of	the	Company’s	shares	at	a	maximum	

new	products	and	maintaining	the	technological	excellence	of	

price	of	105%	of	the	average	middle	market	price	for	the	five	

existing	products.

business	days	immediately	preceding	the	date	of	purchase	and	a	

minimum	price	of	2p	per	share.	This	authority	expires	at	the	AGM	

to	be	held	on	26	August	2021.	335,208	shares	were	purchased	

and	302,667	shares	were	sold	in	the	year	ending	31	March	2021.

Financial instruments

The	Group’s	financial	risk	management	objectives	and	policies	are	

discussed	on	page	92	within	note	32	to	the	accounts.

Own	shares	are	ordinary	2p	shares	purchased	in	order	to	satisfy	

Branch operations

outstanding	option	obligations.	Sales	from	own	shares	are	the	

The	Group	has	branch	operations	located	in	Chennai,	India.

shares	issued	to	option	holders	on	exercise	of	their	options.	The	

maximum	number	of	own	shares	held	in	the	year	was	199,113		

(2020:	488,880),	which	represents	0.49%	(2020:	1.21%)	of	the	

issued	share	capital.

Directors’ indemnities and liability insurance 

Political and Charitable contributions

The	Group	made	no	political	contributions	or	charitable	donations	

during	the	year	(2020:	nil).

Insurance

As	permitted	by	the	Articles	of	Association,	the	Directors	have	the	

The	Group	holds	Directors	and	Officers	Liability	insurance.

benefit	of	an	indemnity	which	is	a	qualifying	third-party	indemnity	

Disclosure of information to the Auditor

provision	as	defined	by	section	234	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.	The	

In	the	case	of	each	of	the	persons	who	are	Directors	of	the	

indemnity	was	in	force	throughout	FY21	and	is	currently	in	force.	The	

Company	at	the	date	when	this	report	was	approved:

Company	also	purchased	and	maintained	Directors’	and	Officers’	

liability	insurance	throughout	the	financial	year	in	respect	of	itself	and	

its	Directors.

Employees

The	Group	has	a	policy	of	offering	equal	opportunities	to	employees	

	z so	far	as	each	of	the	Directors	are	aware,	there	is	no	relevant	 
audit	information	(as	defined	in	the	Companies	Act	2006)	of	 

	 which	the	Company’s	auditor	is	unaware;	and
	z each	of	the	Directors	has	taken	all	the	steps	that	he/she	ought	 
to	have	taken	as	a	Director	to	make	himself/herself	aware	of	 

any	relevant	audit	information	(as	defined)	and	to	establish	that	 

at	all	levels	in	respect	of	the	conditions	of	work.	Throughout	the	

the	Company’s	auditor	is	aware	of	that	information.

Group	it	is	the	Board’s	intention	to	provide	employment	opportunities	

This	confirmation	is	given	and	should	be	interpreted	in	accordance	

and	training	for	disabled	people	and	to	care	for	employees	who	

with	the	provisions	of	s418	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.

become	disabled	having	regard	to	aptitude	and	abilities.

Auditor

Regular	consultation	and	meetings,	formal	or	otherwise,	are	held	

with	all	levels	of	employees	to	discuss	problems	and	opportunities.	

Information	on	matters	of	concern	to	employees	is	presented	 

in	house.

In	accordance	with	Section	489	of	the	Companies	Act	2006,	a	

resolution	for	the	re-appointment	of	RSM	UK	Audit	LLP	as	the	

auditor	of	the	Company	is	to	be	proposed	at	the	forthcoming	

Annual	General	Meeting.

The	Company	operates	share	option	Schemes	which	are	open	to	

all	employees.	The	two	current	Schemes	are	the	D4t4	Solutions	

Employee	Share	Options	‘A’	Scheme	and	the	D4t4	Solutions	EMI	

Share	Options	Scheme.	Details	of	the	share	options	are	laid	out	on	

page	89	within	note	27	to	the	accounts.

Treasury policy

The	Group’s	operations	are	funded	by	cash	reserves.	The	policy	of	

the	Group	is	to	ensure	that	all	cash	balances	earn	a	market	rate	of	

interest.	Bank	relationships	are	maintained	to	ensure	that	sufficient	

cash	and	unutilised	facilities	are	available	to	the	Group.

54

By	order	of	the	Board

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer

Windmill	House,	91-93	Windmill	Road,	Sunbury-on-Thames,	TW16	7EF

28 July 2021

	
	
	
	
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

The	Directors	are	responsible	for	preparing	the	Strategic	Report,	the	Directors’	Report	and	the	Financial	Statements	in	accordance	with	

applicable	law	and	regulations.

Company	law	requires	the	Directors	to	prepare	group	and	company	financial	statements	for	each	financial	year.		The	Directors	have	elected	

under	company	law	and	the	AIM	Rules	of	the	London	Stock	Exchange	to	prepare	the	group	financial	statements	in	accordance	with	

international	accounting	standards	in	conformity	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and	to	prepare	the	company	financial	

statements	in	accordance	with	international	accounting	standards	in	conformity	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and	

applicable	law.

The	group	and	company	financial	statements	are	required	by	law	and	international	accounting	standards	in	conformity	with	the	

requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	to	present	fairly	the	financial	position	of	the	group	and	the	company	and	the	financial	performance	

of	the	group.		The	Companies	Act	2006	provides	in	relation	to	such	financial	statements	that	references	in	the	relevant	part	of	that	Act	to	

financial	statements	giving	a	true	and	fair	view	are	references	to	their	achieving	a	fair	presentation.

Under	company	law	the	Directors	must	not	approve	the	financial	statements	unless	they	are	satisfied	that	they	give	a	true	and	fair	view	of	

the	state	of	affairs	of	the	group	and	the	company	and	of	the	profit	or	loss	of	the	group	for	that	period.	

In	preparing	each	of	the	group	and	company	financial	statements,	the	Directors	are	required	to:

a.	

select	suitable	accounting	policies	and	then	apply	them	consistently;

b.	 make	judgements	and	accounting	estimates	that	are	reasonable	and	prudent;

c.	

state	whether	they	have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	international	accounting	standards	in	conformity	with	the	requirements	of		

the	Companies	Act	2006;

d.	

prepare	the	financial	statements	on	the	going	concern	basis	unless	it	is	inappropriate	to	presume	that	the	group	and	the	company	will		

continue	in	business.

The	Directors	are	responsible	for	keeping	adequate	accounting	records	that	are	sufficient	to	show	and	explain	the	group’s	and	the	

company’s	transactions	and	disclose	with	reasonable	accuracy	at	any	time	the	financial	position	of	the	group	and	the	company	and	enable	

them	to	ensure	that	the	financial	statements	comply	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.		They	are	also	responsible	for	

safeguarding	the	assets	of	the	group	and	the	company	and	hence	for	taking	reasonable	steps	for	the	prevention	and	detection	of	fraud	and	

other	irregularities.

The	Directors	are	responsible	for	the	maintenance	and	integrity	of	the	corporate	and	financial	information	included	on	the	D4t4	Solutions	plc	website.

Legislation	in	the	United	Kingdom	governing	the	preparation	and	dissemination	of	financial	statements	may	differ	from	legislation	in	 

other	jurisdictions.

By	order	of	the	Board

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer
28 July 2021

55

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Corporate Governance	
	
Independent auditor’s report  
to the members of D4t4 Solutions plc

Opinion

We	have	audited	the	financial	statements	of	D4t4	Solutions	Plc	(the	‘Parent	Company’)	and	its	subsidiaries	(together,	the	‘Group’)	for	

the	year	ended	31	March	2021	which	comprise	the	consolidated	income	statement,	consolidated	statement	of	comprehensive	income,	

consolidated	and	Parent	Company	statements	of	changes	in	equity,	consolidated	and	Parent	Company	statements	of	financial	position,	

consolidated	and	Parent	Company	cash	flow	statements	and	notes	to	the	financial	statements,	including	significant	accounting	policies.	

The	financial	reporting	framework	that	has	been	applied	in	their	preparation	is	applicable	law	and	International	Accounting	Standards	in	

conformity	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and,	as	regards	the	Parent	Company	financial	statements,	as	applied	in	

accordance	with	the	provisions	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.

In	our	opinion:	

	z the	financial	statements	give	a	true	and	fair	view	of	the	state		of	the	group’s	and	of	the	parent	company’s	affairs	as	at	31	March	2021		
	 	 and	of	the	Group’s	profit	for	the	year	then	ended;
	z the	Group	financial	statements	have	been	properly	prepared		in	accordance	with	International	Accounting	Standards	in	conformity	with		

the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006;

	z the	Parent	Company	financial	statements	have	been	properly		prepared	in	accordance	with	International	Accounting	Standards	in		
	 	 conformity	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and	as	applied	in	accordance	with	the	Companies	Act	2006;	and
	z the	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	in	accordance		with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.

Basis for opinion

We	conducted	our	audit	in	accordance	with	International	Standards	on	Auditing	(UK)	(ISAs	(UK))	and	applicable	law.	Our	responsibilities	

under	those	standards	are	further	described	in	the	Auditor’s	responsibilities	for	the	audit	of	the	financial	statements	section	of	our	report.	We	

are	independent	of	the	Group	and	Parent	Company	in	accordance	with	the	ethical	requirements	that	are	relevant	to	our	audit	of	the	financial	

statements	in	the	UK,	including	the	FRC’s	Ethical	Standard	as	applied	to	listed	entities	and	we	have	fulfilled	our	other	ethical	responsibilities	in	

accordance	with	these	requirements.	We	believe	that	the	audit	evidence	we	have	obtained	is	sufficient	and	appropriate	to	provide	a	basis	for	

our	opinion.

Conclusions relating to going concern

In	auditing	the	financial	statements,	we	have	concluded	that	the	Directors’	use	of	the	going	concern	basis	of	accounting	in	the	preparation	of	

the	financial	statements	is	appropriate.	Our	evaluation	of	the	Directors’	assessment	of	the	Group’s	and	Parent	Company’s	ability	to	continue	

to	adopt	the	going	concern	basis	of	accounting	included	reviewing	and	evaluating	management’s	forecasts	from	31	March	2021	covering	

a	period	of	over	12	months	from	approval	of	the	financial	statements,	including	review	of	assumptions	used	in	the	forecasts	and	sensitivity	

analysis,	taking	into	account	in	particular	the	Group’s	net	cash	position	at	31	March	2021.

Based	on	the	work	we	have	performed	we	have	not	identified	any	material	uncertainties	relating	to	events	or	conditions	that,	individually	

or	collectively,	may	cast	significant	doubt	on	the	Group’s	or	the	Parent	Company’s	ability	to	continue	as	a	going	concern	for	a	period	of	at	

least	twelve	months	from	when	the	financial	statements	are	authorised	for	issue.

Our	responsibilities	and	the	responsibilities	of	the	directors	with	respect	to	going	concern	are	described	in	the	relevant	sections	of	this	report.

Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

Materiality

Group
	z Revenue	recognition

Group
	z Overall	materiality:	£155,000	(2020:	£247,000)
	z Performance	materiality:	£116,000	(2020:	£185,000)

Parent Company
	z Overall	materiality:	£147,000	(2020:	£247,000)
	z Performance	materiality:	£110,000	(2020:	£185,000)

Scope

Our	audit	procedures	covered,	on	a	sample	basis,	100%	of	revenue,	100%	of	total	assets	and	100%	

of	profit	before	tax.

56

	 	
Key audit matters

Key	audit	matters	are	those	matters	that,	in	our	professional	judgment,	were	of	most	significance	in	our	audit	of	the	Group	and	Parent	

Company	financial	statements	of	the	current	period	and	include	the	most	significant	assessed	risks	of	material	misstatement	(whether	or	

not	due	to	fraud)	we	identified,	including	those	which	had	the	greatest	effect	on	the	overall	audit	strategy,	the	allocation	of	resources	in	the	

audit	and	directing	the	efforts	of	the	engagement	team.	These	matters	were	addressed	in	the	context	of	our	audit	of	the	Group	and	Parent	

Company	financial	statements	as	a	whole,	and	in	forming	our	opinion	thereon,	and	we	do	not	provide	a	separate	opinion	on	these	matters.	

Revenue recognition

Key audit matter description

The	Group	has	revenue	streams	under	product-own	IP,	product-3rd	party,	delivery	services	and	

support	and	maintenance	segments	-	refer	to	notes	2,	3,	4	and	5	to	the	financial	statements	for	

further	details.

How the matter was 

addressed in the audit

The	product	segments	include	revenue	of	one	or	more	elements	of	hardware	and	software	and	are	in	

some	cases	included	in	the	same	contract	as	delivery	services	and	support	and	maintenance.	These	

elements	of	the	contracts	are	in	some	cases	individually	significant	to	the	results	of	the	Group	and	

involve	an	element	of	judgement	in	allocating	the	transaction	price	between	different	performance	

obligations	within	a	contract.	The	different	elements	of	the	contracts	also	often	have	different	

recognition	periods.	We	also	consider	there	to	be	a	significant	risk	of	misstatement	of	the	financial	

statements	arising	from	transactions	occurring	close	to	the	balance	sheet	date,	as	transactions	

could	be	recorded	in	the	wrong	financial	period.	As	such	we	have	determined	revenue	recognition	to	

be	a	key	audit	matter.

In	order	to	address	the	risk	of	material	misstatement	related	to	revenue	recognition	we	have:

	z considered	whether	the	Group’s	revenue	recognition	policy	complies	with	IFRS	15	Revenue	from 
					contracts	with	customers	including	in	respect	of	the	allocation	of	the	transaction	price	to	the				 

					various	performance	obligations	in	the	contracts;
	z considered	whether	the	revenue	recognition	policy	applied	is	in	line	with	the	Group’s	policy;
	z performed	detailed	testing,	focusing	in	particular	on	new/major	contracts	ongoing	at	the	balance	 
					sheet	date;
	z tested	balances	recognised	in	the	Group’s	statement	of	financial	position	and	tested	individual	 
					transactions	occurring	immediately	before	and	after	the	balance	sheet	date.

Our	tests	of	detail	focused	on	the	impact	of	contracts	and	transactions	occurring	within	proximity	of	the	

year	end	across	the	product	segments,	obtaining	evidence	to	support	the	appropriate	timing	of	revenue	

recognition,	based	on	terms	and	conditions	set	out	in	sales	contracts	and	delivery	documents.	

We	performed	tests	of	details	on	accrued	and	deferred	revenue,	deferred	revenue	recognised	at	 

31	March	2021.		We	reviewed	disclosure	in	the	financial	statements	of	the	revenue	recognition	

policies	and	key	estimates	and	judgements	in	respect	of	revenue	recognition.

Our application of materiality

When	establishing	our	overall	audit	strategy,	we	set	certain	thresholds	which	help	us	to	determine	the	nature,	timing	and	extent	of	our	audit	

procedures.	When	evaluating	whether	the	effects	of	misstatements,	both	individually	and	on	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole,	could	

reasonably	influence	the	economic	decisions	of	the	users	we	take	into	account	the	qualitative	nature	and	the	size	of	the	misstatements.	

Based	on	our	professional	judgement,	we	determined	materiality	as	follows:

57

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial StatementsOverall materiality

£155,000	(2020:	£247,000)

£147,000	(2020:	£247,000)

Basis for determining overall 

5%	of	profit	before	tax

5%	of	profit	before	tax

Group

Parent Company

materiality

Rationale for benchmark applied

Profit	measure	used	for	the	trading	activities	

The	Parent	Company	is	the	Group’s	main	

of	the	group;	the	key	measure	used	both	

trading	component;	therefore	the	same	

internally	by	the	Board	and,	we	believe,	

rationale	has	been	applied	to	the	selection	

to	analysts,	externally	by	shareholders	in	

of	the	Parent	Company	materiality	basis;	

evaluating	the	performance	of	the	group.

capped	for	the	purposes	of	calculating	an	

appropriate	component	materiality.

Performance materiality

£116,000	(2020:	£185,000)

£110,000	(2020:	£185,000)

Basis for determining  

performance materiality

75%	of	overall	materiality

75%	of	overall	materiality

Reporting of misstatements to  

Misstatements	in	excess	of	£7,750	and	

Misstatements	in	excess	of	£7,350	and	

the Audit Committee

misstatements	below	that	threshold	that,	 

misstatements	below	that	threshold	that,	 

in	our	view,	warranted	reporting	on	

in	our	view,	warranted	reporting	on	

qualitative	grounds.	

qualitative	grounds.

An overview of the scope of our audit

The	Group	consists	of	two	non-dormant	components,	located	in	the	United	Kingdom	and	the	United	States	of	America.

A	full	scope	audit	was	performed	on	the	component	in	the	United	Kingdom	and	on	the	component	in	the	United	States	of	America,	

achieving	100%	coverage	via	our	audit	procedures.

Other information

The	other	information	comprises	the	information	included	in	the	annual	report,	other	than	the	financial	statements	and	our	auditor’s	report	

thereon.	The	Directors	are	responsible	for	the	other	information	contained	within	the	annual	report.	Our	opinion	on	the	financial	statements	

does	not	cover	the	other	information	and,	except	to	the	extent	otherwise	explicitly	stated	in	our	report,	we	do	not	express	any	form	of	

assurance	conclusion	thereon.	

Our	responsibility	is	to	read	the	other	information	and,	in	doing	so,	consider	whether	the	other	information	is	materially	inconsistent	with	

the	financial	statements	or	our	knowledge	obtained	in	the	course	of	the	audit	or	otherwise	appears	to	be	materially	misstated.	If	we	identify	

such	material	inconsistencies	or	apparent	material	misstatements,	we	are	required	to	determine	whether	this	gives	rise	to	a	material	

misstatement	in	the	financial	statements	themselves.	If,	based	on	the	work	we	have	performed,	we	conclude	that	there	is	a	material	

misstatement	of	this	other	information,	we	are	required	to	report	that	fact.	

We	have	nothing	to	report	in	this	regard.

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In	our	opinion,	based	on	the	work	undertaken	in	the	course	of	the	audit:

	z the	information	given	in	the	Strategic	Report	and	the	Directors’		Report	for	the	financial	year	for	which	the	financial	statements	are		
	 	 prepared	is	consistent	with	the	financial	statements;	and
	z the	Strategic	Report	and	the	Directors’	Report	have	been		prepared	in	accordance	with	applicable	legal	requirements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

In	the	light	of	the	knowledge	and	understanding	of	the	Group	and	the	Parent	Company	and	their	environment	obtained	in	the	course	of	the	

audit,	we	have	not	identified	material	misstatements	in	the	Strategic	Report	or	the	Directors’	Report.

58

We	have	nothing	to	report	in	respect	of	the	following	matters	in	relation	to	which	the	Companies	Act	2006	requires	us	to	report	to	you	if,	in	

our	opinion:

	z adequate	accounting	records	have	not	been	kept	by	the	Parent		Company,	or	returns	adequate	for	our	audit	have	not	been	received		

from	branches	not	visited	by	us;	or

	z the	Parent	Company	financial	statements	are	not	in	agreement		with	the	accounting	records	and	returns;	or
	z certain	disclosures	of	Directors’	remuneration	specified	by	law	are	not	made;	or
	z we	have	not	received	all	the	information	and	explanations	we	require	for	our	audit. 

Responsibilities of Directors

As	explained	more	fully	in	the	Directors’	responsibilities	statement	set	out	on	page	55,	the	Directors	are	responsible	for	the	preparation	of	

the	financial	statements	and	for	being	satisfied	that	they	give	a	true	and	fair	view,	and	for	such	internal	control	as	the	directors	determine	is	

necessary	to	enable	the	preparation	of	financial	statements	that	are	free	from	material	misstatement,	whether	due	to	fraud	or	error.

In	preparing	the	financial	statements,	the	Directors	are	responsible	for	assessing	the	Group’s	and	the	Parent	Company’s	ability	to	continue	

as	a	going	concern,	disclosing,	as	applicable,	matters	related	to	going	concern	and	using	the	going	concern	basis	of	accounting	unless	the	

directors	either	intend	to	liquidate	the	Group	or	the	Parent	Company	or	to	cease	operations,	or	have	no	realistic	alternative	but	to	do	so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

Our	objectives	are	to	obtain	reasonable	assurance	about	whether	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole	are	free	from	material	misstatement,	

whether	due	to	fraud	or	error,	and	to	issue	an	auditor’s	report	that	includes	our	opinion.	Reasonable	assurance	is	a	high	level	of	assurance,	

but	is	not	a	guarantee	that	an	audit	conducted	in	accordance	with	ISAs	(UK)	will	always	detect	a	material	misstatement	when	it	exists.	

Misstatements	can	arise	from	fraud	or	error	and	are	considered	material	if,	individually	or	in	the	aggregate,	they	could	reasonably	be	

expected	to	influence	the	economic	decisions	of	users	taken	on	the	basis	of	these	financial	statements.

The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud

Irregularities	are	instances	of	non-compliance	with	laws	and	regulations.		The	objectives	of	our	audit	are	to	obtain	sufficient	appropriate	

audit	evidence	regarding	compliance	with	laws	and	regulations	that	have	a	direct	effect	on	the	determination	of	material	amounts	and	

disclosures	in	the	financial	statements,	to	perform	audit	procedures	to	help	identify	instances	of	non-compliance	with	other	laws	and	

regulations	that	may	have	a	material	effect	on	the	financial	statements,	and	to	respond	appropriately	to	identified	or	suspected	non-

compliance	with	laws	and	regulations	identified	during	the	audit.		

In	relation	to	fraud,	the	objectives	of	our	audit	are	to	identify	and	assess	the	risk	of	material	misstatement	of	the	financial	statements	due	to	

fraud,	to	obtain	sufficient	appropriate	audit	evidence	regarding	the	assessed	risks	of	material	misstatement	due	to	fraud	through	designing	

and	implementing	appropriate	responses	and	to	respond	appropriately	to	fraud	or	suspected	fraud	identified	during	the	audit.		

However,	it	is	the	primary	responsibility	of	management,	with	the	oversight	of	those	charged	with	governance,	to	ensure	that	the	entity’s	

operations	are	conducted	in	accordance	with	the	provisions	of	laws	and	regulations	and	for	the	prevention	and	detection	of	fraud.

In	identifying	and	assessing	risks	of	material	misstatement	in	respect	of	irregularities,	including	fraud,	the	Group	audit	engagement	team:	

	z obtained	an	understanding	of	the	nature	of	the	industry	and	sector,	including	the	legal	and	regulatory	framework	that	the	Group	and	 
	 	 Parent	Company	operate	in	and	how	the	group	and	parent	company	are	complying	with	the	legal	and	regulatory	framework;
	z inquired	of	management,	and	those	charged	with	governance,	about	their	own	identification	and	assessment	of	the	risks	of		

irregularities,	including	any	known	actual,	suspected	or	alleged	instances	of	fraud;

	z discussed	matters	about	non-compliance	with	laws	and	regulations	and	how	fraud	might	occur	including	assessment	of	how	and		
	 	 where	the	financial	statements	may	be	susceptible	to	fraud.

All	relevant	laws	and	regulations	identified	at	a	Group	level	and	areas	susceptible	to	fraud	that	could	have	a	material	effect	on	the	financial	

statements	were	communicated	to	component	auditors.		Any	instances	of	non-compliance	with	laws	and	regulations	identified	and	

communicated	by	a	component	auditor	were	considered	in	our	audit	approach.

59

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	 	
	
	 	
The	most	significant	laws	and	regulations	were	determined	as	follows:

Legislation / Regulation

Additional audit procedures performed by the Group audit engagement team included:

International Accounting 

Review	of	financial	statement	disclosures	and	testing	to	supporting	documentation;

Standards and Companies  

Act 2006

Completion	of	disclosure	checklists	to	identify	areas	of	non-compliance.

Tax compliance regulations

Consideration	of	whether	any	matters	identified	during	the	audit	required	reporting	to	an	appropriate	

authority	outside	the	entity.

General Data Protection 

We	have	inquired	of	management	and	where	appropriate,	inspected	legal	and	regulatory	

Regulation

correspondence.

The	areas	that	we	identified	as	being	susceptible	to	material	misstatement	due	to	fraud	were:

Risk

Audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team: 

Revenue recognition

Audit	procedures	performed	in	relation	to	revenue	recognition	included	assessment	of	the	revenue	

recognition	policies	in	place	and	their	application,	the	performance	of	substantive	testing	including	

consideration	of	existence,	and	review	of	the	cut-off	treatment	of	significant	contracts	around	the	

year-end.

Management override of 

Testing	the	appropriateness	of	accounting	journal	entries	and	other	adjustments;	

internal controls 

Assessing	whether	the	judgements	made	in	making	accounting	estimates	are	indicative	of	a	

potential	bias;	and

Evaluating	the	business	rationale	of	any	significant	transactions	that	are	unusual	or	outside	of	the	

normal	course	of	business.

A	further	description	of	our	responsibilities	for	the	audit	of	the	financial	statements	is	located	on	the	Financial	Reporting	Council’s	website	

at:	http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.	This	description	forms	part	of	our	auditor’s	report.

Use of our report 

This	report	is	made	solely	to	the	Company’s	members,	as	a	body,	in	accordance	with	Chapter	3	of	Part	16	of	the	Companies	Act	2006.		Our	

audit	work	has	been	undertaken	so	that	we	might	state	to	the	Company’s	members	those	matters	we	are	required	to	state	to	them	in	an	

auditor’s	report	and	for	no	other	purpose.		To	the	fullest	extent	permitted	by	law,	we	do	not	accept	or	assume	responsibility	to	anyone	other	

than	the	Company	and	the	Company’s	members	as	a	body,	for	our	audit	work,	for	this	report,	or	for	the	opinions	we	have	formed.

William Farren FCA
Senior Statutory Auditor 

For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered Accountants
25 Farringdon Street 
London  EC4A 4AB

28 July 2021

60

 
Consolidated income statement 
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Continuing operations

Revenue	

Cost	of	sales	

Gross profit 

Administration	expenses	

Other	operating	income	

Profit from operations 

Finance	income	

Financing	costs	

Profit before tax 

Tax 

Attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Earnings per share from continuing operations 
attributable to the equity holders of the parent 

Basic		

Diluted	

Notes 

4,5		

6	

8 

9 

9	

10		

13

2021 

£’000 

22,792 

(8,566)	

14,226 

(11,234)	

58	

3,050 

25	

(32)	

3,043 

(274)	

2,769 

6.88p	

6.75p	

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Other comprehensive income:

Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss

Gains	on	property	revaluation	

Exchange	differences	on	translation	of	foreign	operations	

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable 
to equity holders of the parent 

2021	

£’000	

2,769 

70	

(11)	

2,828 

16	

11	

2020

£’000

21,748

(8,537)

13,211

(8,343)

58

4,926

43

-

4,969 

(522)

4,447

11.12p

11.04p

2020

£’000

4,447

71

24

4,542

61

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
attributable to Equity Holders of the Parent
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Share 

Share  Merger  Revaluation 

Own 

Equity 

Retained 

Notes 

capital  premium 

reserve 

reserve 

shares 

 reserve  

earnings 

Total 

£’000

Balance at 1 April 2019 

794 

2,624 

5,977 

1,099 

(1,127) 

10 

15,463 

24,840

Dividends	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

Issue	of	new	shares	-
exercise	of	share	options	

Settlement	of	share-	
based	payments	

Share-based	payment	charge	

27	

Deferred	tax	on	outstanding
share	options	

11	

Transactions with  
equity holders 

Profit	for	the	year	

Other	comprehensive	income	

Total comprehensive income 

12	

23	

22	

-	

-	

-	

-	

14	

741	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

14 

741 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

4	

-	

-	

4 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

71	

71 

-	

(69)	

-	

856	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

(3)	

-	

(7)	

(1,235)	

(1,235)

-	

-	

(516)	

97	

(69)

755

341

97

-	

(7)

787 

(10) 

(1,654) 

(118)

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

- 

4,447	

4,447

24	

95

4,471 

4,542

18,280 

29,264

(1,090)	

(1,090)

-	

(868)

(262)	

276	

404

276

(1,076) 

(1,278)

2,769	

61	

2,830 

2,769

131

2,900

20,034 

30,886

Balance at 1 April 2020 

808 

3,365 

5,981 

1,170 

(340) 

Dividends	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

12	

23	

Settlement	of	share-
based	payments	

Share-based	payment	charge	

27	

Transactions with  
equity holders 

Profit	for	the	year	

Other	comprehensive	income	

Total comprehensive income 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

70	

70 

-	

(868)	

666	

-	

(202) 

-	

-	

- 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

808 

3,365 

5,981 

1,240 

(542) 

62

 
 
 
 
	
 
	
	
 
 
	
 
	
	
 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position 
as at 31 March 2021

Non-current assets

Goodwill	

Other	intangible	assets	

Property,	plant	and	equipment	

Deferred	tax	assets	

Current assets

Trade	and	other	receivables	

Tax	receivables	

Inventories	

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	

Total assets  

Equity

Share	capital	

Share	premium	account	

Merger	reserve	

Revaluation	reserve	

Own	shares	

Retained	earnings	

Total equity  

Current liabilities

Trade	and	other	payables	

Lease	obligations	

Non-current liabilities

Lease	obligations	

Deferred	tax	liabilities	

Total liabilities 

Total equity and liabilities 

Notes 

14	

15	

16	

11	

18	

19	

31	

22	

22	

24	

25	

23	

20	

21	

21	

11 

2021	

£’000	

8,696	

872	

4,141	

-	

13,709 

13,362	

414	

129	

14,241	

28,146 

41,855 

808	

3,365	

5,981		

1,240	

(542)	

20,034	

30,886 

10,691	

83	

10,774 

194	

1	

195 

10,969 

41,855 

These	financial	statements	were	approved	by	the	Board	of	Directors	and	authorised	for	issue	on	28	July	2021	and	

were	signed	on	its	behalf	by:

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer

Company	registration	number:	01892751	(England	and	Wales)

2020

£’000

8,696

956

4,099

283

14,034

10,137

649

1,266

12,772

24,824

38,858

808

3,365

5,981

1,170

(340)

18,280

29,264

9,377

-

9,377 

-

217

217

9,594

38,858

63

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated cash flow statement 
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Cash generated from operations 

Taxes	received	/	(paid)	

Net cash generated from  operating activities  

Investing activities

Interest	received	

Purchase	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

Capitilisation	of	development	costs	

Net cash used in investing activities 

Financing	activities

Dividends	paid	

Lease	repayments	

Interest	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

Exercise	of	share	options	

Net cash used in financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	at	start	of	year	

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

Notes	

30 

31 

2021	

£’000	

3,258 

80	

3,338 

25	

(34)	

(195)	

(204) 

(1,090)	

(79)	

(32)	

(868)	

404	

(1,665) 

1,469  

12,772	

14,241 

2020

£’000

3,116

(738)

2,378

43

(249)

(188)

(394)

(1,235)

-

-

(69)

1,096

(208)

1,776

10,996

12,772

64

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity 
attributable to Equity Holders of the Parent
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Share 

Share  Merger  Revaluation 

Own 

Equity 

Retained 

Notes 

capital  premium 

reserve 

reserve 

shares 

 reserve  

earnings 

Total 

£’000

Balance at 1 April 2019 

794 

2,624 

5,977 

1,099 

(1,127) 

10 

17,095 

26,472

Dividends	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

Issue	of	new	shares	-
exercise	of	share	options	

Settlement	of	share-	
based	payments	

Share-based	payment	charge	

27	

Deferred	tax	on	outstanding
share	options	

11	

Transactions with  
equity holders 

Profit	for	the	year	

Other	comprehensive	income	

Total comprehensive income 

12	

23	

22	

-	

-	

-	

-	

14	

741	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

14 

741 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

4	

-	

-	

4 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

71	

71 

-	

(69)	

-	

856	

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

(3)	

-	

(7)	

(1,235)	

(1,235)

-	

-	

(516)	

97	

(69)

755

341

97

-	

(7)

787 

(10) 

(1,654) 

(118)

-	

-	

- 

Balance at 1 April 2020 

808 

3,365 

5,981 

1,170 

(340) 

Dividends	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

12	

23	

Settlement	of	share
based	payments	

Share-based	payment	charge	

27	

Transactions with  
equity holders 

Profit	for	the	year	

Other	comprehensive	income	

Total comprehensive income 

Foreign	exchange	and	 
other	movements	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

70	

70 

-	

-	

(868)	

666	

-	

(202) 

-	

-	

- 

-	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

808 

3,365 

5,981 

1,240 

(542) 

-	

-	

- 

- 

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

- 

-	

- 

3,676	

3,676

-	

71

3,676 

3,747

19,117 

30,101

(1,090)	

(1,090)

-	

(868)

(262)	

276	

404

276

(1,076) 

(1,278)

1,988	

1,988

-	

70

1,988 

2,058

(17)	

(17)

20,012 

30,864

65

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
	
 
	
	
 
 
	
 
	
	
 
	
 
Company statement of financial position 
as at 31 March 2021 

Non-current assets

Goodwill	

Other	intangible	assets	

Property,	plant	and	equipment	

Investment	in	subsidiaries		

Deferred	tax	assets	

Current assets

Trade	and	other	receivables	

Tax	receivables	

Inventories	

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	

Total assets  

Equity

Share	capital	

Share	premium	account	

Merger	reserve	

Revaluation	reserve	

Own	shares	

Retained	earnings	

Total equity 

Current liabilities

Trade	and	other	payables	

Lease	obligations	

Non-current liabilities

Lease	obligations	

Deferred	tax	liabilities	

Total liabilities 

Total equity and liabilities 

Notes 

14	

15	

16	

17	

11	

18	

19	

31	

22	

22	

24	

25	

23	

20	

21	

21	

11 

2021	

£’000	

8,696	

872	

4,100	

273	

-	

13,941 

13,835	

414	

4	

14,133	

28,386 

42,327 

808	

3,365	

5,981		

1,240	

(542)	

20,012	

30,864 

11,193	

45	

11,238 

191	

34	

225 

11,463 

42,327 

2020

£’000

8,696

956

4,099

273

10

14,034

11,211

649

7

12,694

24,561

38,595

808

3,365

5,981

1,170

(340)

19,117

30,101

8,277

-

8,277 

-

217

217

8,494

38,595

The	Company’s	profit	for	the	year	was	£2.0m	(2020:	£3.7m).

These	financial	statements	were	approved	by	the	Board	of	Directors	and	authorised	for	issue	on	28	July	2021	and	

were	signed	on	its	behalf	by:

Peter	Kear
Chief Executive Officer

Company	registration	number:	01892751	(England	and	Wales)

66

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company cash flow statement 
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Cash generated from operations 

Income	taxes	received	/	(paid)	

Net cash generated from  operating activities  

Investing activities

Interest	received	

Purchase	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

Capitalisation	of	development	costs	

Net cash used in investing activities 

Financing activities

Dividends	paid	

Lease	repayments	

Interest	paid	

Purchase	of	own	shares	

Exercise	of	share	options	

Net cash used in financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	at	start	of	year	

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

Notes	

30 

31 

2021	

£’000	

3,125 

80	

3,205 

91	

(33)	

(195)	

(137) 

(1,090)	

(50)	

(25)	

(868)	

404	

(1,629) 

1,439  

12,694	

14,133 

2020

£’000

3,038

(738)

2,300

43

(249)

(188)

(394)

(1,235)

-

-

(69)

1,096

(208)

1,698

10,996

12,694

67

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements

1. General information

Adoption of new and revised standards

D4t4	Solutions	plc	is	a	public	limited	company	incorporated	and	

The	Group	has	applied	IFRS	16	Leases	for	the	year	commencing	1	

domiciled	in	England	and	Wales	and	quoted	on	the	AIM	Market,	

April	2020	as	it	was	immaterial	for	the	previous	financial	year.

hence	there	is	no	ultimate	controlling	party.

The	Group	has	applied	the	modified	retrospective	approach	from	1	

Details	of	substantial	shareholdings	are	shown	in	the	Directors’	

April	2020	but	has	not	restated	comparatives	for	the	year	ended	31	

report	on	page	53.

The	address	of	its	registered	office,	registered	number	and	

principal	place	of	business	is	disclosed	on	the	inside	cover	of	the	

financial	statements.

The	financial	statements	of	D4t4	Solutions	plc	and	its	subsidiaries	

(the	Group)	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	were	authorised	

and	issued	by	the	Board	of	Directors	on	28	July	2021	and	the	

Consolidated	Statement	of	Financial	Position	was	signed	on	the	

Board’s	behalf	by	Peter	Kear.

2. Significant accounting policies

Basis of preparation

The	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	

International	Accounting	Standards	adopted	by	the	Companies	

Act	2006	applicable	to	companies	reporting	under	International	

Accounting	Standards.

March	2020	as	permitted	under	the	specific	transitional	provisions	

in	the	standard.	The	reclassifications	and	the	adjustments	arising	

from	the	new	leasing	rules	are	therefore	recognised	in	the	opening	

balance	sheet	on	1	April	2020.	

On	adoption	of	IFRS	16,	the	Group	recognised	lease	liabilities	

in	relation	to	leases	which	had	previously	been	classified	as	

‘operating	leases’	under	the	principles	of	IAS	17	Leases.	These	

liabilities	were	measured	at	the	present	value	of	the	remaining	lease	

payments,	discounted	using	the	lessee’s	incremental	borrowing	

rate	as	of	1	April	2020.	

The	weighted	average	lessee’s	incremental	borrowing	rate	

applied	to	the	lease	liabilities	on	1	April	2020	was	2.5%	and	9.3%	

depending	on	the	jurisdiction	of	the	lease.

The	associated	right-of-use	assets	for	property	leases	and	other	

right-of-use	assets	were	measured	at	the	amount	equal	to	the	

lease	liability,	adjusted	by	the	amount	of	any	prepaid	or	accrued	

lease	payments	relating	to	that	lease	recognised	in	the	balance	

The	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	under	the	historical	

sheet	as	at	31	March	2021.	There	were	no	onerous	lease	contracts	

cost	convention,	with	the	exception	of	land	and	buildings	which	is	

that	would	have	required	an	adjustment	to	the	right-of-use	assets	

held	at	valuation.

at	the	date	of	initial	application.	

The	presentation	and	functional	currency	of	the	financial	

In	applying	IFRS	16	for	the	first	time,	the	Group	has	used	the	

statements	is	British	Pounds	and	amounts	are	rounded	to	the	

following	practical	expedients	permitted	by	the	standard:	

nearest	thousand	pounds. 

Going concern

The	Group	and	Company’s	business	activities,	together	with	

the	factors	likely	to	affect	its	future	development,	performance	

and	position	and	the	risks	and	uncertainties	are	presented	in	the	

Strategic	Report	on	pages 24	to	25.	The	Group	and	Company	

have	sufficient	financial	resources	to	cover	budgeted	future	

cashflows,	together	with	contracts	with	a	number	of	customers	

and	suppliers	across	different	geographic	areas	and	industries.	As	

a	consequence,	the	Directors	believe	that	the	Group	and	Company	

are	well	placed	to	manage	their	business	risks	successfully.

Having	reviewed	the	impact	of	the	global	pandemic	on	the	

business,	and	stress-tested	the	Group’s	future	plans	and	cash	

flow	projections,	the	Directors	are	confident		that	the	Group	and	

Company	have	adequate	resources	to	continue	in	operational	

existence	for	the	foreseeable	future.	For	this	reason,	they	 
continue	to	adopt	the	going	concern	basis	in	preparing	the	

financial	statements.

	z the	use	of	a	single	discount	rate	to	a	portfolio	of	leases	 
	 	 with	reasonably	similar	characteristics
	z reliance	on	previous	assessments	on	whether	leases	 
	 	 are	onerous	
	z the	exclusion	of	initial	direct	costs	for	the	measurement	of	the	 

right-of-use	asset	at	the	date	of	initial	application,	and	

	z the	use	of	hindsight	in	determining	the	lease	term	where	the	 
	 	 contract	contains	options	to	extend	or	terminate	the	lease.	

Other Standards, amendments effective and applied in the 

period to 31 March 2021: 

Besides	the	application	of	IFRS	16	for	the	first	time	in	the	current	

financial	year	as	already	outlined	above,	the	Group	has	also	

applied	the	following	standards	and	amendments	for	the	first	time	

for	their	annual	reporting	period	commencing	1	April	2020:

	z Definition	of	Material	–	amendments	to	IAS	1	and	IAS	8	
	z Definition	of	a	Business	–	amendments	to	IFRS	3	
	z Interest	Rate	Benchmark	Reform	–	amendments	to	IFRS	9,		

IAS	39	and	IFRS	7	

68

	 	
	 	
	z Revised	Conceptual	Framework	for	Financial	Reporting	
	z Covid	-19	Related	Rent	Concessions	–	amendments	to		

IFRS	16	and	Interest	Rate	Benchmark	Reform	 

	 	 amendments	to	IFRS	7,	IAS	39	and	IFRS	9

approved	financial	statements.	The	profit	of	the	parent	is	disclosed	

at	the	foot	of	the	Company	Statement	of	Financial	Position	and	

Statement	of	Changes	in	Equity	for	the	year.

The	amendments	listed	above	did	not	have	any	impact	on	the	

Property, plant and equipment

amounts	recognised	in	prior	periods	and	are	not	expected	to	

The	carrying	value	of	these	assets	is	stated	at	cost	or	valuation,	

significantly	affect	the	current	or	future	periods. 

less	accumulated	depreciation	and	any	impairment	loss.	Freehold	

Standards, amendments and interpretations to existing 

standards that have not been early adopted by the Group: 

Certain	new	accounting	standards	and	interpretations	have	been	

published	that	are	not	mandatory	for	31	March	2021	reporting	

periods	and	have	not	been	early	adopted	by	the	Group.	These	

standards	–	outlined	below	–	are	not	expected	to	have	a	material	

impact	on	the	entity	in	the	current	or	future	reporting	periods	and	
on	foreseeable	future	transactions.	

	z Amendments	to	IFRS	3	Business	Combinations;	IAS	16		
	 	 Property,	Plant	and	Equipment;	IAS	37	Provisions,	Contingent		

land	is	not	depreciated.	The	estimated	lives	of	assets	are	 

reviewed	annually	by	the	Board,	the	lives	and	values	are	adjusted	

as	necessary,	and	any	impairment	loss	is	recognised	in	the 

income	statement.	Freehold	land	and	buildings	were	last	valued	

professionally	at	31	March	2018	but	are	valued	by	the	Directors	on	

an	annual	basis.	The	carrying	values	are	reviewed	for	impairment	

when	events	or	changes	in	circumstances	indicate	that	the	carrying	

value	may	not	be	recoverable.	

The	Group	makes	provision	for	depreciation	so	that	the	cost	less	

estimated	residual	value	of	each	asset	is	written	off	by	equal	

instalments	over	its	estimated	useful	economic	life	as	follows:

	 	 Liabilities	and	Contingent	Assets;	and	Annual	Improvements		

Buildings	

-	up	to	35	years

	 	 2018-2020	(all	issued	on	14	May	2020	and	effective	for	years		

	 	 commencing	on	or	after	1	January	2022)
	z Amendments	to	IFRS	9,	IAS	39,	IFRS	7,	IFRS	4	and	IFRS	16		
Interest	Rate	Benchmark	Reform	–	Phase	2	(issued	on	27		

	 	 August	2020	and	effective	for	years	commencing	on	or	after		

from	1	January	2021

Basis of consolidation

The	consolidated	financial	statements	incorporate	the	financial	

statements	of	the	Company	and	its	subsidiaries	made	up	to	the	

reporting	date.

Leasehold	improvements	

-	up	to	10	years

Fixtures	and	equipment	

-	up	to	4	years

Motor	vehicles	

-	up	to	5	years

Revaluation	gains/losses	are	shown	in	the	Statement	of 	

Comprehensive	Income	and	recognised	in	Other	comprehensive 	

income.	Where	losses	are	greater	than	previously	recognised 	

gains,	these	are	taken	to	the	income	statement.  

Acquisitions

On	the	acquisition	of	a	business,	net	fair	values	are	attributed	to	

Investees	are	classified	as	subsidiaries	where	the	Company	has	

the	identifiable	assets	and	liabilities	acquired.	Where	the	cost	of	

control,	which	is	achieved	where	the	Company	has	the	power	to	

acquisition	exceeds	this	net	fair	value,	the	difference	is	treated	

govern	the	financial	and	operating	policies	of	an	investee	entity,	

as	purchased	goodwill	and	capitalised	in	the	Group	Statement	of	

exposure	to	variable	returns	from	the	investee	and	the	ability	

Financial	Position	in	the	year	of	acquisition.	If	a	subsidiary’s	assets	

to	use	its	power	to	affect	those	variable	returns.	All	intra-group	

are	subsequently	hived	up	into	the	parent	then	the	corresponding	

transactions,	balances,	income	and	expenses	are	eliminated	 

amount	of	goodwill	is	capitalised	in	the	Company	Statement	of	

on	consolidation.

Financial	Position. 

The	consolidated	financial	statements	incorporate	the	results	

of	business	combinations	using	the	acquisition	method.	In	

Goodwill

the	statement	of	financial	position,	the	acquiree’s	identifiable	

Capitalised	goodwill	is	shown	in	the	Statement	of	Financial	

assets	and	liabilities	are	initially	recognised	at	their	fair	values	at	

Position.	Its	carrying	value	is	subject	to	annual	review	and	any	

acquisition	date.	The	results	of	acquired	entities	are	included	in	the	

impairment	is	recognised	immediately	as	a	loss	which	cannot	

Consolidated	Statement	of	Comprehensive	Income	from	the	date	

subsequently	be	reversed.	Goodwill	arising	on	acquisitions	 

at	which	control	is	obtained	and	are	deconsolidated	from	the	date	

made	before	the	date	of	transition	to	IFRS	has	been	retained	at	the	

control	ceases.

previous	UK	GAAP	amount	subject	to	being	tested	annually	 

In	accordance	with	Section	408	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	D4t4	

for	impairment.

Solutions	plc	is	exempt	from	the	requirement	to	present	its	own	

Goodwill	has	arisen	from	the	acquisition	of	businesses. 

income	statement	and	related	notes	that	form	a	part	of	these	

69

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	 	
	 	
	 	
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

Investments in subsidiaries

The	intangible	asset	is	recognised	using	the	cost	model	and	is	

The	carrying	value	of	investments	is	stated	at	cost	less	any	

carried	at	its	cost	less	any	accumulated	amortisation	and	any	

provision	for	impairment.	This	value	is	reviewed	annually	by	the	

accumulated	impairment	losses.

Board	with	respect	to	future	cash	flows	in	respect	of	revenue	

streams	related	to	the	investment. 

Other intangible assets

Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)

Foreign currencies 

In	line	with	IAS	21,	transactions	denoted	in	foreign	currencies	

are	recorded	at	an	approximation	of	the	exchange	rate	ruling	

on	the	date	of	the	transaction.	Monetary	assets	and	liabilities	

On	the	acquisition	of	a	business,	the	fair	value	of	IPR	is	estimated	

denominated	in	foreign	currencies	are	translated	using	the	rate	of	

and	capitalised	taking	into	consideration	the	software	development	

exchange	ruling	at	the	balance	sheet	date	and	the	gains	or	losses	

cycle	and	the	amount	of	effort	involved	between	updated	versions	

on	translation	are	included	in	the	profit	and	loss	account.

of	the	software.	The	fair	value	is	amortised	over	the	expected	

development	cycle	which	is	estimated	to	be	eight	years.

Similarly,	for	translation	of	foreign	operations,	transactions	are	

recorded	at	an	approximation	of	the	exchange	rate	ruling	in	

Capitalised	IPR	is	shown	in	the	balance	sheet.	Its	carrying	value	

the	period	of	consolidation.	Monetary	assets	and	liabilities	are	

is	subject	to	annual	review	and	any	impairment	is	recognised	
immediately	as	a	loss	which	cannot	subsequently	be	reversed.	

translated	using	the	rate	of	exchange	ruling	at	the	balance	sheet	
date	and	the	gains	or	losses	on	translation	are	included	in	Other	

comprehensive	income.

Trade names

On	the	acquisition	of	a	business,	the	future	value	of	the	trade	name	

Profit from operations 

of	that	business	is	estimated	and	capitalised.	The	fair	value	is	

Profit	from	operations	is	stated	before	investment	income,	

amortised	over	ten	years.

Impairment	of	intangibles	is	reviewed	annually	with	reference	to	

future	cash	flows	from	the	specific	cash	generating	units	to	which	

the	intangible	asset	has	been	allocated.

Inventory

Inventories	are	stated	at	the	lower	of	cost	or	net	realisable	value.	

The	valuation	method	for	each	item	of	inventory	remains	consistent	

from	one	accounting	period	to	the	next. 

Research and development costs

finance	costs	and	other	gains	and	losses.	Other	gains	and	losses	

principally	include	movements	in	property	valuation	and	are	

included	in	Other	comprehensive	income.

Lease commitments

Leases

The	Group	has	applied	IFRS	16	using	the	modified	retrospective	

approach	with	effect	from	1	April	2020	and	therefore	comparative	

information	has	not	been	restated.	Comparative	information	is	

therefore	still	reported	under	IAS	17	and	IFRIC	4.	

Accounting	policy	applicable	before	1	April	2020:	

To	assess	whether	research	and	development	expenditure	has	

Rentals	applicable	to	operating	leases	where	substantially	all	of	the	

generated	an	intangible	asset	the	Group	classifies	the	expenditure	

benefits	and	risks	of	ownership	do	not	transfer	to	the	lessee	are	

into	two	phases,	the	research	phase	and	the	development	phase.

charged	to	the	income	statement	on	a	straight	line	basis	over	the	

Expenditure	on	the	research	phase	is	recognised	as	an	expense	

period	of	the	lease.	

when	it	is	incurred.

Accounting	policy	applicable	from	1	April	2020:	

Expenditure	on	the	development	phase	is	recognised	as	an	intangible	

On	adoption	of	IFRS	16,	the	Group	recognised	lease	liabilities	

asset	if,	and	only	if,	each	of	the	following	can	be	demonstrated:

in	relation	to	leases	which	had	previously	been	classified	as	

(a)		the	technical	feasibility	of	completing	the	asset;

‘operating	leases’	under	the	principles	of	IAS	17	Leases.	These	

liabilities	were	measured	at	the	present	value	of	the	remaining	

(b)	its	intention	to	complete	and	use	or	sell	the	asset;

lease	payments,	discounted	using	the	lessee’s	incremental	

(c)		its	ability	to	use	or	sell	the	asset;

borrowing	rate	as	of	1	April	2020.	The	weighted	average	lessee’s	

incremental	borrowing	rate	applied	to	the	lease	liabilities	on	1	April	

(d)		how	the	asset	will	generate	future	economic	benefit;

2020	was	2.5%.	

(e)		the	availability	of	sufficient	resources	to	complete	the 

	 development	and	to	use	or	sell	the	asset;

(f)		the	ability	to	measure	reliably	the	expenditure	incurred	on	the		

asset	during	its	development.

For	leases	previously	classified	as	finance	leases,	the	Group	

recognised	the	carrying	amount	of	the	lease	asset	and	lease	

liability	immediately	before	transition	as	the	carrying	amount	of	

the	right-of-use	asset	and	the	lease	liability	at	the	date	of	initial	

application.	The	measurement	principles	of	IFRS	16	are	only	

70

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
applied	after	that	date.	These	finance	leases	were	not	remeasured	

	 	 date	less	any	lease	incentives	received	•	any	initial		

at	the	date	of	initial	application	as	they	are	considered	immaterial.	

The	Group	has	also	elected	not	to	reassess	whether	a	contract	is,	

	 	 direct	costs,	and	
	z restoration	costs.	

or	contains,	a	lease	at	the	date	of	initial	application.	Instead,	for	

Payments	associated	with	short-term	leases	and	leases	of	low-

contracts	entered	into	before	the	transition	date	the	Group	relied	

value	assets	are	recognised	on	a	straight-line	basis	as	an	expense	

on	its	assessment	made	applying	IAS	17	and	IFRIC	4	Determining 

in	the	income	statement.	Short-term	leases	are	leases	with	a	lease	

whether an Arrangement contains a lease.	The	Group	leases	

term	of	12	months	or	less.	

various	offices,	equipment	and	cars.	Rental	contracts	are	typically	

made	for	fixed	periods	of	1	to	10	years	but	may	have	extension	

options	as	described	below.	

Dividends

Lease	terms	are	negotiated	on	an	individual	basis	and	contain	a	

wide	range	of	different	terms	and	conditions.	The	lease	agreements	

do	not	impose	any	covenants,	but	leased	assets	may	not	be	used	

as	security	for	borrowing	purposes.	

Until	31	March	2020,	leases	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

and	cars	were	classified	as	either	finance	or	operating	leases.	

Payments	made	under	operating	leases	(net	of	any	incentives	

Final	dividend	distribution	to	the	Company’s	shareholders	is	

recognised	as	a	liability	in	the	Group’s	financial	statements	in	 

the	period	in	which	the	dividends	are	approved	by	the	 

Company’s	shareholders.

Interim	and	prior	period	dividends	paid	are	included	in	the	
Statement	of	Changes	in	Equity.

received	from	the	lessor)	were	charged	to	the	income	statement	on	

Share-based payments

a	straight-line	basis	over	the	period	of	the	lease.	

Periodically	the	Group	offers	share	options	(at	the	prevailing	

From	1	April	2020,	leases	are	recognised	as	a	right-of-use	asset	

and	a	corresponding	liability	at	the	date	at	which	the	leased	asset	

is	available	for	use	by	the	Group.	Each	lease	payment	is	allocated	

between	the	liability	and	finance	cost.	The	finance	cost	is	charged	

to	the	income	statement	over	the	lease	period	so	as	to	produce	

a	constant	periodic	rate	of	interest	on	the	remaining	balance	of	

the	liability	for	each	period.	The	right-of-use	asset	is	depreciated	

over	the	shorter	of	the	asset’s	useful	life	and	the	lease	term	on	a	

straight-line	basis.	Assets	and	liabilities	arising	from	a	lease	are	

initially	measured	on	a	present	value	basis.	Lease	liabilities	include	

the	net	present	value	of	the	following	lease	payments:	

	z fixed	payments	(including	in-substance	fixed	payments),	less		
    any lease incentives receivable 
	z variable	lease	payment	that	are	based	on	an	index	or	a	rate	
	z amounts	expected	to	be	payable	by	the	lessee	under	 

residual	value	guarantees	

	z the	exercise	price	of	a	purchase	option	if	the	lessee	is	 

reasonably	certain	to	exercise	that	option,	and	

market	price)	to	employees.	The	Group	has	conformed	with	the	

requirements	of	IFRS	2	“Share	Based	Payment”	for	share	options	

issued	after	7	November	2002	and	unvested	at	31	March	2021.	

Those	options	are	measured	at	fair	value	(using	the	Black-Scholes	

model	and	management’s	best	estimates)	and	are	expensed	on	a	

straight-line	basis	over	their	vesting	period.	Options	vest	only	when	

the	Remuneration	committee	is	satisfied	that	the	vesting	criteria	

have	been	met,	and	are	settled	subsequently	by	equity	shares	in	

the	parent	company	and	unless	the	Board,	at	its	discretion,	agrees	

to	settle	in	cash.

Treasury shares

From	time	to	time	the	Company	purchases	its	own	shares	for	the	

purpose	of	satisfying	the	future	exercising	of	outstanding	share	

options.	These	shares	are	held	in	treasury	and	are	shown	as	a	

reduction	in	the	Company’s	reserves.

Own shares

On	the	acquisition	of	a	business,	the	accrual	for	the	future	value	

	z payments	of	penalties	for	terminating	the	lease,	if	the	lease	 

of	own	shares	contingent	upon	no	warranty	claims	being	made	is	

term	reflects	the	lessee	exercising	that	option.

classified	as	equity	where	there	is	a	fixed	value	and	hence	fixed	

The	lease	payments	are	discounted	using	the	interest	rate	implicit	

in	the	lease.	If	that	rate	cannot	be	determined,	the	lessee’s	

incremental	borrowing	rate	is	used,	being	the	rate	that	the	lessee	

would	have	to	pay	to	borrow	the	funds	necessary	to	obtain	an	

asset	of	similar	value	in	a	similar	economic	environment	with	

similar	terms	and	conditions.	

Right-of-use	assets	are	measured	at	cost	comprising	the	following:	

	z the	amount	of	the	initial	measurement	of	lease	liability	
	z any	lease	payments	made	at	or	before	the	commencement		

number	of	the	company’s	shares	to	be	issued.	Where	the	value	of	

the	contingent	shares	is	not	fixed	at	the	point	of	acquisition,	these	

are	treated	as	a	financial	liability	under	IAS	32.

Pension costs
The	Group	operates	a	defined	contribution	pension	scheme.	The	

assets	of	the	scheme	are	held	separately	from	those	of	the	Group	

in	an	independently	administered	fund.	The	amount	charged	

against	profits	represents	the	contributions	payable	to	the	scheme	

in	respect	of	the	accounting	period.

71

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	 	
	 	
	 	
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

Taxation

Products – 3rd Party

Current	tax	(UK	and	foreign)	is	calculated	on	the	profit	for	the	year	

D4t4	services	are	focused	on	delivering	data	management	using	

(adjusted	for	appropriate	tax	reliefs,	allowances,	non-deductible	

public	and	private	cloud	infrastructure	that	is	securely	designed	to	

expenses	and	timing	differences)	using	the	appropriate	tax	rates	

ensure	our	clients	can	operationalise	data	within	their	organisation.	

and	laws	that	have	been	enacted	or	substantively	enacted	by	the	

In	addition,	we	design	and	build	performant	platforms	for	critical	

balance	sheet	date.		Deferred	tax	is	recognised	in	respect	of	all	

business,	analytics,	compliance,	risk,	marketing	and	artificial	

material	temporary	differences	in	the	treatment	of	certain	items	

intelligence	applications.	Where	these	are	on	premise	Customer	

for	taxation	and	accounting	purposes	which	have	arisen	but	have	

Data	Management	platform	solutions	they	will	include	both	

not	reversed	by	the	balance	sheet	date.	It	is	recognised	at	the	

hardware	and	third	party	software.	The	revenue	for	each	product	

expected	prevailing	rate	at	the	time	of	reversal,	and	is	recognised	

is	recognised	when	the	full	performance	obligation	has	been	

as	an	asset	only	to	the	extent	that	it	is	probable	that	taxable	profits	

satisfied,	typically	this	is	when	the	hardware	and	associated	third	

will	be	available	to	utilise	it.	It	is	reviewed	annually. 

party	software	is	delivered	to	the	customers	designated	premises.	

This	is	when	control	passes	to	the	customer. 

Revenue recognition

Revenue	is	measured	at	the	transaction	price	received	or	receivable	

Delivery Services

from	the	sale	of	goods	and	services	in	the	ordinary	course	of	the	

For	delivery	services	work,	revenue	is	recognised	over	time	

Group’s	activities.	Revenue	is	shown	net	of	value	added	tax,	rebates	

by	comparing	how	much	of	the	project	has	been	completed	

and	discounts	and	after	the	elimination	of	intercompany	transactions	

versus	total	expected	time	required	and	also	with	reference	to	

within	the	Group.

The	Group	recognises	revenue	as	it	satisfies	its	performance	

obligations	by	transferring	promised	goods	and	services	to	its	

the	completion	of	specific	milestones.	This	is	because	costs	are	

incurred	in	proportion	to	the	Group’s	progress	as	it	satisfies	its	

performance	obligations.

customers.	The	Group	bases	its	estimates	on	historical	results,	taking	

In	relation	to	time-based	projects,	time	on	projects	is	recoverable	

into	consideration	the	type	of	customer,	the	type	of	transaction	and	

on	a	time	and	expenses	basis	at	an	agreed	daily	rate	and	is	

the	specifics	of	each	arrangement.

In	line	with	the	requirements	of	IFRS	8	Operating	Segments,	which	

requires	the	disclosure	of	segmental	reporting	information	that	is	

being	used	internally	by	management,	the	following	segmental	

reporting	is	in	use: 

Products – Own IP

D4t4	create,	author,	market	and	sell	a	software	product,	Celebrus,	

focused	on	the	capture	of	customer	data	from	 

all	digital	channels.	This	data	is	then	used	in	applications	that	

deliver	artificial	intelligence,	customer	insight	and	analytics,	

personalisation,	decisioning	and	customer	relationship	

management.

The	Group	has	also	created	its	own	IP	in	order	to	create	

architecture	and	deployments	for	high	performance	on	premise	or	

cloud	solutions	that	combine	hardware,	software	and	services.

Perpetual	licence	revenue	is	recognised	upon	delivery	as	the	

company	has	no	further	obligations	to	the	customer	once	the	

non-refundable	licences	have	been	delivered.	Any	upgrade	to	

the	software	will	be	supplied	as	part	of	an	ongoing	maintenance	

contract	that	the	customer	may	make.	This	maintenance	contract	

is	covered	under	the	hosting	and	support	services	policy	below.	

Term	licences	are	recognised	upon	delivery	at	the	commencement	

of	the	term. 

invoiced	to	the	customer	in	the	month	of	performance	and	

an	associated	value	is	recognised.	The	Group	has	a	right	to	

consideration	from	its	customers	in	an	amount	that	corresponds	

directly	with	the	value	to	the	customer	of	the	Group’s	performance	

completed	on	a	daily	basis. 

Support and maintenance

Support	and	maintenance	is	typically	of	a	recurring	nature	and	

is	made	up	of	hosting,	support	services	and	maintenance.	The	

Group’s	efforts	are	expended	evenly	throughout	the	performance	

period	therefore	revenue	is	recognised	on	a	straight-line	basis	over	

the	period	of	the	contract,	normally	12	months. 

Bundled goods and services

Products	(software	and	hardware),	delivery	services	and	support	

and	maintenance	services	are	often	bundled	together	in	a	contract.

The	products	and	the	services	are	considered	to	be	separate	

performance	obligations	on	the	basis	that	the	products	can	be	

delivered	with	or	without	the	hosting	and	other	services	and	

therefore	the	products	and	services	are	not	interdependent	or	

interrelated	with	another	good	or	service.	Software	and	hardware	

however	require	combined	delivery	to	the	customer	to	benefit	

from	them	and	are	therefore	considered	to	be	interdependent	and	

interrelated	and	one	performance	obligation.

72

In	allocating	the	consideration	to	the	separate	performance	

contractual	rights	to	receive	the	cash	flows	of	the	financial	asset	and	

obligations,	the	standalone	selling	price	is	determined	by	reference	

substantially	all	the	risks	and	rewards	of	ownership	are	transferred	

to	an	internal	price	book.

to	another	party.		

When	there	is	no	reasonable	expectation	of	recovering	a	financial	

Partnerships with third party organisations

asset	it	is	derecognised	(‘written	off’).

The	Company	sells	both	directly	to	the	customer	and	through	

partnerships..	The	Company	acts	as	principal	in	the	sale	to	

the	partner.	The	partner	then	uses	the	products	and	services	

The	gain	or	loss	on	derecognition	of	financial	assets	measured	at	

amortised	cost	is	recognised	in	profit	or	loss.

purchased	from	the	Company	as	part	of	their	sale	to	their	

A	financial	liability	(or	part	thereof)	is	derecognised	when	the	obligation	

customer.	The	revenue	will	consist	of	a	combination	of	licence,	

specified	in	the	contract	is	discharged,	cancelled	or	expires.

project	and	recurring	as	defined	in	the	revenue	recognition	policy	

above,	and	hence	is	recognised	as	defined	there.

Any	difference	between	the	carrying	amount	of	a	financial	liability	

(or	part	thereof)	that	is	derecognised	and	the	consideration	paid	is	

Financial	assets	and	financial	liabilities	are	recognised	when	

recognised	in	profit	or	loss.

the	Group	becomes	party	to	the	contractual	provisions	of	the	

instrument. 

Financial assets 

Impairment of financial assets 

An	impairment	loss	is	recognised	for	the	expected	credit	losses	
on	financial	assets	when	there	is	an	increased	probability	that	the	

counterparty	will	be	unable	to	settle	an	instrument’s	contractual	

Initial	and	subsequent	measurement	of	financial	assets

cash	flows	on	the	contractual	due	dates,	a	reduction	in	the	

Cash and cash equivalents

amounts	expected	to	be	recovered,	or	both.		

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	comprise	cash	at	bank	and	in	hand	

The	probability	of	default	and	expected	amounts	recoverable	are	

and	other	short-term	deposits	held	by	the	Group	with	maturities	of	

assessed	using	reasonable	and	supportable	past	and	forward-

less	than	three	months.

Trade, Group and other receivables

Trade	receivables	are	initially	measured	at	their	transaction	price.	

Group	and	other	receivables	are	initially	measured	at	fair	value	plus	

transaction	costs.

Receivables	are	held	to	collect	the	contractual	cash	flows	which	

are	solely	payments	of	principal	and	interest.	Therefore,	these	

receivables	are	subsequently	measured	at	amortised	cost	using	

the	effective	interest	rate	method.

Financial liabilities and equity

looking	information	that	is	available	without	undue	cost	or	effort.		

The	expected	credit	loss	is	a	probability-weighted	amount	

determined	from	a	range	of	outcomes	and	takes	into	account	the	

time	value	of	money. 

Trade and other receivables

For	trade	receivables,	expected	credit	losses	are	measured	by	

applying	an	expected	loss	rate	to	the	gross	carrying	amount.	

The	expected	loss	rate	comprises	the	risk	of	a	default	occurring	

and	the	expected	cash	flows	on	default	based	on	the	ageing	of	

the	receivable.	The	Group	has	adopted	a	simplified	approach	to	

Financial	liabilities	and	equity	instruments	are	classified	according	

calculating	its	expected	credit	loss	provision.	For	intercompany	

to	the	substance	of	the	contractual	arrangements	entered	into.		An	

loans	that	are	repayable	on	demand,	expected	credit	losses	are	

equity	instrument	is	any	contract	that	evidences	a	residual	interest	
in	the	assets	of	the	company	after	deducting	all	of	its	liabilities. 

based	on	the	assumption	that	repayment	of	the	loan	is	demanded	
at	the	reporting	date.	If	the	subsidiary	does	not	have	sufficient	

Initial and subsequent measurement of financial liabilities

Trade, Group and other payables

Trade,	Group	and	other	payables	are	initially	measured	at	fair	

accessible	highly	liquid	assets	in	order	to	repay	the	loan	if	

demanded	at	the	reporting	date,	the	parent	Company	assesses	the	

expected	manner	of	recovery. 

value,	net	of	direct	transaction	costs	and	subsequently	measured	

Borrowings 

at	amortised	cost.

Equity instruments

Equity	instruments	issued	by	the	Company	are	recorded	at	fair	

value	on	initial	recognition	net	of	transaction	costs.	

Interest	bearing	bank	loans	are	recorded	at	the	proceeds	received,	

net	of	direct	issue	costs.	Finance	charges,	including	premiums	

payable	on	settlement	or	redemption	and	direct	issue	costs,	

are	charged	to	profit	or	loss	over	the	period	using	the	effective	
interest	rate	method	and	are	added	to	the	carrying	amount	of	the	

Derecognition of financial assets (including write-offs) and financial 

instrument	to	the	extent	that	they	are	not	settled	in	the	period	in	

liabilities

which	they	arise. 

A	financial	asset	(or	part	thereof)	is	derecognised	when	the	

contractual	rights	to	cash	flows	expire	or	are	settled,	or	when	the	

73

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial StatementsNotes to the financial statements
(continued)

Borrowing costs 

Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets

Borrowing	costs	are	recognised	as	an	expense	in	the	period	in	

The	ongoing	valuation	of	goodwill	for	the	purposes	of	determining	

which	they	arise.

Related party transactions

These	are	disclosed	in	note	29	of	the	financial	statements.

impairment	requires	the	evaluation	of	future	cash	flows	from	the	

cash	generating	unit	to	which	the	goodwill	has	been	allocated.	

This	is	disclosed	in	note	14. 

3. Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation 

uncertainty

In	applying	the	accounting	polices	described	in	note	2	the 	

Directors	are	required	to	make	judgements,	estimates	and 	

assumptions	of	the	carrying	values	of	assets	and	liabilities	as	at 	

the	statement	of	financial	position	date	and	the	amounts	reported 	

for	revenues	and	expenses	during	the	year.	However,	the	nature 	

of	estimations	means	that	actual	outcomes	could	differ	from 	
those	estimates.	These	judgements	are	reviewed	on	an	ongoing 	

basis,	and	recognise	revisions	to	accounting	estimates	in	the 	

period	in	which	the	Directors	revise	the	estimate	and	in	any	future 	

periods	affected.	It	is	considered	that	all	judgements	have	an 	

element	of	estimation. 

a) Judgements

Capitalisation of development costs 

Internal	activities	are	continually	undertaken	to	enhance	and 	

maintain	our	products	in	a	bid	to	stay	ahead	of	our	competition. 		

Whether	this	expenditure	is	an	internally	generated	intangible 	

Lease accounting 

Lease	payments	requires	lease	payments	to	be	discounted	

using	the	lessee’s	incremental	borrowing	rate-	the	incremental	

borrowing	rate	IFRS	16	“Leases”.	The	Group’s	incremental	

borrowing	rate,	as	at	the	date	of	adoption	of	IFRS	16,	has	been	

based	on	local	commercial	or	bank	loan	rates.	Therefore,	specific	

cost	of	borrowing	has	been	applied	to	each	lease	as	this	reflects	

the	different	economic	conditions	within	each	geography	and	is	

therefore	more	representative	of	the	funding	facilities	available	in	

those	countries.

4. Business and geographical segments

IFRS	8	Operating	Segments	requires	these	to	be	identified	on	

the	basis	of	internal	reports	about	components	of	the	Group	that	

are	regularly	reviewed	by	the	chief	operating	decision	maker	to	

allocate	resources	to	the	segments	and	assess	their	performance.

The	Group	has	four	tightly	integrated	service	lines	that	are	offered	

to	clients.	These	service	lines	combine	one	or	more	of	four	types	

of	revenue	to	deliver	on	our	core	services.

asset	requires	management	to	make	judgements,	especially 	

Information	is	presented	to	the	Board	on	the	revenue	analysis	

with	respect	to	whether	the	asset	created	will	generate	future 	

below:

economic	benefit.	

This	is	a	key	judgement	in	this	respect	as	the	time	between 	

development	and	any	income	can	be	considerable	and	often 	

the	income-generating	asset	may	have	considerably	evolved 	

from	the	asset	originally	created.	As	a	result	of	this,	the	Group 	

	z Product	-	Own	IP
	z Product	-	3rd party	
	z Delivery	services	
	z Support	and	maintenance

almost	always	expenses	a	significant	percentage	of	research	and 	

All	revenue	streams	are	recognised	on	a	point	in	time	basis	apart	

development	in	the	period	it	is	incurred.  

from	Support	and	maintenance	which	is	recognised	over	time.

b) Estimates and assumptions

No	allocation	of	other	income	and	costs	to	these	categories	is	

made	because	the	Directors	consider	that	any	such	allocation	

The	key	assumptions	concerning	the	future	and	other	key	sources	

would	be	arbitrary	and	contract	sensitive,	as	would	be	any	

of	estimation	uncertainty	at	the	statement	of	financial	position	date	

allocation	of	assets	and	liabilities.

that	have	a	significant	risk	of	causing	material	adjustment	to	the	

carrying	amounts	of	assets	and	liabilities	within	the	next	financial	

year	are	discussed	below. 

The	segmental	reporting	set	out	below	is	consistent	with	that	

provided	to	the	Board	of	Directors.	

The	segmental	reporting	analysis	is	as	follows:

Share-based compensation 

Management	believes	that	there	will	not	be	only	one	acceptable 	
choice	for	estimating	the	fair	value	of	share	based	payment 	

arrangements.	The	judgements	and	estimates	that	management 	

apply	in	determination	of	the	share-based	compensation	are 	

detailed	further	in	note	27.	 

74

 Continuing operations 2021  

       Group

Products	-	Own	IP	

Products	-	3rd	party	

Delivery	services	

Support	and	maintenance	

Revenue 

Cost	of	sales	

Gross profit 

Other	operating	costs	and	income	

Investing	and	financing	activities	

Profit before tax 

2021	

£’000		

9,005	

4,403	

2,886	

6,498	

22,792 

(8,566)	

14,226 

(11,176)	

(7)	

3,043 

   Major customers (partners) over 10% of revenue	

2021	

£’000	

2021	

£’000	

2020	

£’000	

2020	

£’000	

7,658

4,362

3,629

6,099

21,748

(8,537)

13,211

(8,285)

43

4,969

2020

£’000

Products	-	Own	IP	

Products	-	3rd	party	

Delivery	services	

Support	&	maintenance	

Total Revenue 

Customer	1	

Customer	2	

Customer	1	

Customer	2

3,682	

3,775	

769	

2,764	

10,990 

1,154	

-	

-	

1,663	

2,817 

3,855	

	3,401	

1,515	

2,616	

11,387 

1,363

-

2

1,767

3,132

The	accounting	policies	of	the	reportable	segments	are	the	same	as	the	Group’s	accounting	policies	described	in	note	2.

5. Revenue

Geographical information

United	Kingdom	

Rest	of	Europe	

United	States	of	America	

Others	

Group

2021	
£’000		

2,983	

2,396	

16,699	

714	

22,792 

2020		 	

£’000  

4,158

3,162

13,327

1,101

21,748

The	geographical	revenue	segment	is	determined	by	the	domicile	of	the	external	customer.

Non-current	assets,	including	Property,	Plant	and	Equipment,	Goodwill	and	Intangibles,	are	all	located	in	the	United	Kingdom. 

These	are	not	reported	to	management	on	a	segmented	basis. 

Analysis of revenue	
  Continuing operations	

Sale	of	goods	

Rendering	of	services	

Group

2021	

£’000	

5,964		

16,828		

22,792  

2020	

£’000

4,472	

17,276	

21,748 

75

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

Timing of transfer	

  Goods and services transferred at a point in time 

Products	-	Own	IP	

Products	-	3rd	party	

Delivery	services	

  Goods and services transferred over time

Support	and	maintenance	

Contract balances	

Receivables	included	within	Trade	and	other	receivables	

Contract	assets	

Contract	liabilities	

Group

2021	

£’000	

9,005	

4,403		

2,886	

2020	

£’000

7,658	

4,362	

3,629		

6,498		

22,792  

6,099

21,748 

Group

2021	

£’000	

10,165	

2,554		

6,288		

2020	

£’000

7,970

1,534	

4,057

Contract	assets	predominantly	relate	to	fulfilled	obligations	in	respect	of	Own	IP	and	3rd	Party	Products,	Delivery	services	and	Support	and	

maintenance	which	have	not	been	invoiced.

At	the	point	of	invoice,	the	contract	asset	is	derecognised	and	a	corresponding	trade	receivable	is	recognised.

Contract	liabilities	relate	to	consideration	received	from	customers	in	advance	of	work	being	completed.	

6. Analysis of expenses by nature

The	breakdown	by	nature	of	expenses	is	as	follows:	

Employee remuneration

	(see	note	7)	

Intangible assets 

Amortisation	of	intangible	assets	(see	note	15)	

Research	and	development	costs		expensed	

Property, plant and equipment

Depreciation	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	(see	note	16)	

Gain	on	disposal	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

Group

2021	

£’000	

2020

£’000

11,393 

9,720

279	

913	

1,192 

395	

(8)	

387 

246

784

1,030

327

-

327

76

 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Auditor’s remuneration

-		for	audit	services	(Group	and	Company,	the	Company	fee	is	not	separately	quantifiable)		

-		for	other	services	

Impairment	of	trade	receivables	

Operating	leases	

Net	foreign	exchange	loss	/	(gains)	

Other	expenses	

Total	cost	of	sales	and	administration	expenses	

7. Staff costs

The	average	number	of	employees	(including	Directors)	

during	the	year	was:		

Production	and	support	

Distribution	

Administration	

Their	aggregate	remuneration	comprised:	 	

Salaries	

Social	security	costs	

Defined	contribution	costs	

Share-based	payments:	equity	settled		

Group

2021	

£’000	

2020

£’000

57	

-	

57 

-	

-	

54

9

63

57

58

746	

6,026	

19,800 

(362)

5,987

16,880

Group	

Company

2021	

2020	

2021	

Number	

Number	

Number	

2020

Number

94	

30	

15	

139 

£’000	

9,632	

1,025	

418	

318	

90	

27	

15	

132 

£’000	

8,341	

870	

412	

97	

86	

25	

15	

126 

£’000	

7,924	

924	

359	

318	

84

23

15

122

£’000

6,856

779

357

97

11,393 

9,720 

9,525 

8,089

Key	management	personnel	consist	of	the	Board	of	Directors	and	their	remuneration	(included	in	the	totals	above)	was	as	follows:

Emoluments	

Social	security	costs	

Defined	contribution	costs	

Share-based	payments:	equity	settled		

Group and Company

2021	

£’000		

1,352		

183		

39		

194		

2020		 	

£’000		

1,287	

167	

42	

66	

1,768 

1,562

Details	of	Directors	remuneration	required	by	the	Companies	Act	are	set	out	in	the	audited	information	included	in	the	Directors 

Remuneration	report	on	pages	47	to	51.	

Other	related	party	transactions	including	loans	and	dividends,	involving	Directors	are	disclosed	in	the	Directors	report	on	pages	52	to	54.	

77

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

8. Other operating income

Analysis of other operating income

Operating	lease	receipts	(see	note	28)		

9. Finance income and finance costs

Analysis of finance income

Bank	interest	received	

Other		

Analysis of finance costs

Lease	interest	

Other		

10. Taxation

Current	UK	tax	

Foreign	tax	

Less:	double	taxation	relief	

Over	provision	in	prior	year	

Deferred	tax	

-	change	in	rate	

-	temporary	differences	

-	US	tax	charge	/	(credit)	

Corporation tax 

78

Group

2021	

£’000		

2020		 	

£’000		

58	

58 

58	

58

Group

2021	

£’000		

2020		 	

£’000		

23	

2	

25 

(24)	

(8)	

(32) 

2021	

£’000		

101	

109	

(3)	

-	

207 

22	

(196)	

241	

67	

274 

43 

-

43

-

-

-

2020    

£’000

142

60

(1)

(245)

(44)

- 

331

235

566

522 

 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
The	charge	for	the	year	can	be	reconciled	to	the	reported	profit	as	follows:		

Profit	before	tax	

UK	corporation	tax	at	19%	(2020:	19%)	

Research	and	development	credit	

Patent	Box	

Exercise	of	share	options	

Difference	between	writing-down	allowances		and	depreciation	

Other	non-deductible	expenses	

Amortisation	of	intangibles	-	ineligible		

Effect	of	different	rates	in	other	jurisdictions	

Movement	in	US	tax	losses	

Over	provision	in	prior	year	

Effect	of	change	in	tax	rates	on	deferred	tax	opening	balance	

Double	tax	relief	brought	forward	-	India	

Tax	charge	as	above	

2021	

£’000		

3,043	

578	

(225)	

(70)	

(182)	

24	

(14)	

(3)	

109	

38	

-	

22	

(3)	

274 

11. Deferred tax

Group	

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Recognised	within	the
Statement	of	Changes
in	Equity	

(Charge)	/	credit	to 
Income	Statement	

Balance at 1 April 2020 

(Charge)	/	credit	to
Income	Statement	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Company		

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Recognised	within	the
Statement	of	Changes
in	Equity	

(Charge)	/	credit	to 
Income	Statement	

Balance at 1 April 2020 

(Charge)	/	credit	to
Income	Statement	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

	 Other	timing	

Equity	 Share	based	

differences	

reserve	

payments	

Tax	losses	

Intangibles	

£’000	

(43)	

£’000	

7	

£’000	

340	

£’000	

484	

£’000	

(173)	

-	

(12)	

(55) 

10	

(45) 

(7)	

-	

24	

-	

17

-	

- 

-	

- 

(330)	

10 

166	

176 

(235)	

273 

(240)	

33 

11	

(162) 

(3)	

(165) 

	 Other	timing	

Equity	 Share	based	

differences	

reserve	

payments	

Intangibles	

(43)	

-	

(12)	

(55) 

10	

(45) 

£’000	

7	

£’000	

340	

(7)	

-	

-	

- 

-	

- 

(330)	

10 

166	

176 

£’000	

(173)	

-	

11	

(162) 

(3)	

(165) 

2020    

£’000

4,969

944

(240)

(76)

34

17

10

-

33

45

(245)

-

-

522

Total

£’000

615

(566)

66

(67)

(1)

Total

£’000

131

(7)

(331)

(207)

173

(34)

79

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

A	deferred	tax	rate	of	19%	(2020:	19%)	has	been	used.

The	financial	statements	include	a	deferred	tax	asset	of	£33k	(2020:	£273k)	in	respect	of	trading	losses	in	the	Group’s	US	subsidiary.	In 	

accordance	with	the	requirement	of	IAS	12	Income	Taxes,	the	Directors	have	considered	the	likely	recovery	of	this	deferred	tax	asset.	The 	

Directors	have	taken	into	account	expected	future	taxable	profits	and	expect	an	improvement	in	profitability	and	profits	in	future	periods 	

and	that	this	will	be	sustained.	Accordingly	the	Directors	have	satisfied	themselves	that	it	is	appropriate	to	recognise	the	above	deferred 	

tax	asset.	

The	corporation	tax	rate	in	the	UK	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	was	19.0%	(2020:	19.0%)	which	has	been	applied	by	D4t4	Solutions	

plc	in	calculating	its	income	tax	(see	note	10).		The	increase	in	future	UK	corporation	tax	rate	to	25.0%	(to	be	effective	1	April	2023)	was	

substantively	enacted	in	May	2021.		The	effect	of	this	rate	change	if	it	was	applied	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	would	be	an	increase	

in	the	deferred	tax	charge	and	net	liability	of	£10k.

12. Dividends

Amounts	recognised	as	distributions	to	equity	holders:

Final	dividend	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2020	of	1.9p		
(for	the	year	ended	31	March	2019:	2.3p)	per	share	

Interim	dividend	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	of	0.81p	
(31	March	2020:	0.77p)	per	share	

2021	

£’000		

2020	

£’000		

765	

925

325	

1,090	

310

1,235

Proposed	final	dividend	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	of	2.0p	per	share

The	proposed	final	dividend	is	subject	to	shareholders’	approval	at	the	AGM	and	has	not	been	included	as	a	liability	in	these	financial	statements.

13. Earnings per share

The	calculation	of	earnings	per	share	is	based	on	profit	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	and	the	weighted	average	number	of	ordinary	

shares	in	issue	during	the	year.

The	adjusted	earnings	per	share	figures	have	been	calculated	based	on	earnings	before	adjusted	items.	These	have	been	presented	to	

provide	shareholders	with	an	additional	measure	of	the	Group’s	year-on-year	performance.

For	diluted	earnings	per	share,	the	weighted	average	number	of	ordinary	shares	in	issue	is	adjusted	to	assume	conversion	of	all	dilutive	

potential	ordinary	shares	arising	from	share	options	granted	to	employees	where	the	exercise	price	is	less	than	market	price	of	the	

Company’s	ordinary	shares	at	the	year	end.

Details	of	the	adjusted	earnings	per	share	are	set	out	below:

Profit	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	

Amortisation	of	intangible	assets	(see	note	15)	

Share-based	payments	(see	note	27)	 	

Net	foreign	exchange	differences	

Restructuring	costs	

Tax	on	the	adjustments	

Adjusted	profit	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	

80

2021	

£’000		

2,769	

279	

318	

746	

58	

(260)	

3,910 

2020	

£’000

4,447

246	

97	

(362)

96

(15)

4,509

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
Basic	weighted	average	number	of	shares,	excluding	own	shares,	in	issue	

Dilutive	effect	of	share	options	

Diluted	weighted	average	number	of	shares,	excluding	own	shares,	in	issue	

Basic	Earnings	per	share	

Diluted	Earnings	per	share	

Adjusted	Basic	Earnings	per	share	

Adjusted	Diluted	Earnings	per	share	

14. Goodwill

Cost of goodwill	

Balance	at	1	April	2019,	31	March	2020	and	31	March	2021	

Accumulated impairment charge

Balance	at	1	April	2019,	31	March	2020	and	31	March	2021	

Carrying amount at year end 

Allocation of goodwill (Group and Company)

Balance at 1 April 2019 and 31 March 2020	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

2021	

No.	

2020

No.

40,235,856 

39,976,957

771,396	

299,994

41,007,252  

40,276,951

2021	

2020

Pence	per	

Pence	per

share 

6.88	

6.75	

9.72	

9.54	

share

11.12

11.04

11.28

11.19

Group 

Company

£’000	

10,952 

£’000

10,608

2,256 

8,696 

1,912

8,696

Speed-Trap 

8,696	

8,696

Goodwill	acquired	in	a	business	combination	is	allocated	at	acquisition	to	the	cash-generating	units	(CGUs)	that	are	expected	to	benefit	

from	that	business	combination.

Goodwill	is	not	amortised	but	tested	annually	for	impairment	with	the	recoverable	amount	being	determined	from	value	in	use	calculations.	

The	key	assumptions	for	the	value	in	use	calculations	are	those	regarding	the	discount	rate,	growth	rates,	pre-tax	cash	flow	and	forecasts	

of	income	and	costs.	

The	Group	assessed	whether	the	carrying	value	of	goodwill	was	supported	by	the	discounted	cash	flow	forecasts	of	the	Group	based	on	

financial	forecasts	approved	by	management	covering	a	one-year	period,	taking	into	account	both	past	performance	and	expectations	for	

future	market	developments.

Management	estimates	the	discount	rate	using	a	pre-tax	rate	that	reflects	current	market	assessments	of	the	time	value	of	money	and	the	

risks	specific	to	each	separate	business	unit	if	applicable.	The	impairment	charge	was	£nil	(2020:	£nil).	The	recoverable	amount	of	the	CGU	

is	determined	from	value	in	use	calculations.	

Key assumptions used for the value-in-use calculations

Value	in	use	was	determined	by	discounting	future	cash	flows	generated	from	the	continuing	use	of	the	titles	and	was	based	on	the	
following	most	sensitive	assumptions:

	z cash	flows	for	2021/22	were	projected	based	on	the	forecast	for	2021/22,	using	the	budget	as	a	base	and	sensitising	in	light	of	the	 
	 	 current	environment;
	z forecasts	based	on	current	customer	contracts	and	gross	margins	being	achieved;

81

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
		
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

	z cash	flows	for	year	ending	31	March	2022	were	projected	based	on	the	Group	forecast	for	that	year	based	on	the	current	economic	 
	 	 environment	in	respect	of	the	global	pandemic.	For	years	ending	31	March	2023	onwards,	cash	flows	were	prepared	using	underlying	 
	 	 growth	rates	of	2%	based	on	a	conservative	view;
	z cash	flows	were	discounted	using	the	CGU’s	pre-tax	discount	rate	of	11.6%	(2020:	15%).

Based	on	the	above	sensitivity	assumptions	the	calculations	disclosed	headroom	against	the	carrying	value	of	goodwill	for	the	CGU.	

Management	carried	out	several	sensitivity	scenarios	on	the	data.	These	were	based	on	best	estimates	under	the	current	economic	

environment	created	by	the	global	pandemic.	

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions

The	margins	achieved	are	based	on	actual	margins,	the	forecast	revenues	are	based	on	budget	for	the	current	year	and	an	ongoing	2%	

growth	rate.

The	discount	rate	is	considered	to	be	the	variable	with	the	maximum	impact.	Varying	this	by	20%	would	still	allow	the	recoverable	amount	

to	exceed	the	carrying	value.	Therefore	management	is	confident	in	the	assumptions	used. 

Management	has	considered	the	growth	rates	used	in	light	of	the	global	pandemic	and	remains	confident	that	they	are	reasonable.

Management	are	satisfied	that	a	reasonable	change	in	the	key	assumptions	used	in	assessing	the	recoverable	amounts	of	the	cash	

generating	unit	would	not	give	rise	to	the	recoverable	amount	exceeding	the	carrying	value.		

15. Other intangible assets

Group & Company	

Cost

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Additions	

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Additions	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Accumulated amortisation

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Amortisation	

Balance at 1 April 2020	

Amortisation	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Carrying amount

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Balance	at	31	March	2020	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

	 Development	
	 Costs	

Internally	
generated	IPR	

Purchased	
IPR	

	 £’000	

£’000	

£’000	

-	

188	

188 

195	

383 

-	

-	

-	

33	

33 

-	

188	

350 

56	

-	

56 

-	

56 

56	

-	

56 

-	

56 

-	

-	

- 

1,858	

-	

1,858 

-	

1,858 

929	

232	

1,161 

232	

1,393 

929	

697	

465 

Trade	
name

£’000	

142	

-	

142 

-	

142 

57	

14	

71 

14	

85 

85	

71	

57 

Total

£’000

2,056

188

2,244

195

2,439

1,042

246

1,288

279

1,567

1,014

956

872

The	amortisation	charge	for	the	year	is	booked	to	administration	expenses.

Development	Costs	are	amortised	over	8	years.

The	remaining	amortisation	period	for	the	Purchased	IPR	is	2	years	(2020:	3	years)	and	for	the	Trade	name	is	4	years	(2020:	5	years).	

82

 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
16. Property, plant and equipment

Group 

Cost or valuation

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Additions	

Balance	at	1	April	2020 

Additions	

Disposals	

Land	&	
buildings	

Fixtures	&		
equipment	

Motor	 Right	of	Use	
Asset

vehicles	

Total

£’000	

£’000	

£’000	

£’000	

£’000

3,300	

-	

3,300 

-	

-	

1,658	

249	

1,907 

34	

(1)	

Balance	at	31	March	2021 

3,300 

1,940 

Depreciation 

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Depreciation	charge	

Revaluation	

Balance	at	1	April	2020	

Depreciation	charge	

Revaluation	

Eliminated	on	disposals	

Balance	at	31	March	2021	

Carrying amount

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Balance	at	31	March	2020	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

-	

71	

(71)	

- 

70	

(70)	

-	

- 

3,300	

3,300	

3,300 

899	

230	

-	

1,129 

241	

-	

-	

1,370 

759	

778	

570 

111	

-	

111 

-	

(46)	

65 

64	

26	

-	

90 

10	

-	

(46)	

54 

47	

21	

11 

-	

-	

- 

334	

-	

334 

-	

-	

- 

74	

-	

74 

-	

-	

260 

5,069

249

5,318

368

(47)

5,639

963

327	

(71)

1,219 

395

(70)

(46)

1,498

4,106

4,099

4,141

83

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

Land	&	
buildings	

Fixtures	&		
equipment	

Motor	 Right	of	Use	
Asset

vehicles	

Total

£’000	

£’000	

£’000	

£’000	

£’000

Company 	

Cost or valuation

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Additions	

Balance	at	1	April	2020 

Additions	

Disposals	

3,300	

-	

3,300 

-	

-	

1,658	

249	

1,907 

33	

-	

Balance	at	31	March	2021 

3,300 

1,940 

-	

71	

(71)	

- 

70	

(70)	

-	

- 

3,300	

3,300	

3,300 

899	

230	

-	

1,129 

241	

-	

-	

1,370 

759	

778	

570 

Depreciation 

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Depreciation	charge	

Revaluation	

Balance	at	1	April	2020	

Depreciation	charge	

Revaluation	

Eliminated	on	disposals	

Balance	at	31	March	2021	

Carrying amount

Balance	at	1	April	2019	

Balance	at	31	March	2020	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Allocation	of	Group	depreciation	charge	

Cost	of	sales	

Administration	expenses	

Charge for year 

Property, plant and equipment held at valuation

111	

-	

111 

-	

(46)	

65 

64	

26	

-	

90 

10	

-	

(46)	

54 

47	

21	

11 

-	

-	

- 

264	

-	

264 

-	

-	

- 

45	

-	

45 

-	

-	

219 

2021	

£’000	

51	

344	

395 

5,069

249

5,318

297

(46)

5,569

963

327	

(71)

1,219 

366

(70)

(46)

1,469

4,106

4,099

4,100

2020	

£’000

60	

267

327

In	respect	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	held	at	valuation,	the	comparable	carrying	amount	that	would	have	been	recognised	if	the	assets	

had	been	carried	under	the	historical	cost	model	are	as	follows: 

Group and Company	

Land	and	buildings	

2021	

£’000	

1,753 

2020	

£’000

1,753

Included	in	land	&	buildings	(valued	in	2018)	is	freehold	land	at	£1,230,000	(2020:	£1,230,000)	which	is	not	subject	to	depreciation.	The	land	

and	buildings	original	purchase	cost	was	£2,224,000.

For	detail	on	the	fair	value	measurement	of	the	freehold	land	and	buildings	see	note	32.	

84

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
17. Investment in subsidiaries

Cost of investment	

Balance	at	1	April	2020	and	31	March	2021	

Accumulated provision for impairment 

Balance	at	1	April	2020	and	31	March	2021	

Carrying amount at year end 

IS	Solutions	Limited	(formerly	Celebrus	Limited)†	
Celebrus	Technologies	Limited*†	
Chapter26	Limited†	
D4t4	Solutions	Inc§	
D4t4	Solutions	Pty	Limited‡	
Internet	Service	Solutions	Limited†	
Internet	Systems	Solutions	Limited†	
Internet	Site	Solutions	Limited†	
Magiq	Limited*†	
Speed-Trap	Holdings	Limited†	

Company

2021	

£’000	

273 

-	

273 

2020	

£’000

273

-

273

Proportion	of
ownership	of
ordinary	shares

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100% 

Country	of	
Incorporation	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

Nature	of	business	

Dormant	

Dormant	

Dormant	

USA	

Software	&	services	

Australia	

Software	&	services	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

England	&	Wales	

Dormant	

Dormant	

Dormant	

Dormant	

Dormant	

Registered	address	-	Windmill	House,	91-93	Windmill	Road,	Sunbury-on-Thames,	TW16	7EF,	UK

*	Owned	by	Speed-Trap	Holdings	Limited
† 
§ Registered	address	-	215	E	Chatham	Street,	Suite	215,	Cary,	North	Carolina	27511,	USA
‡	Incorporated	12	January	2021.	Registered	address	-	Level	19,	207	Kent	Street,	Sydney,	NSW	2000,	Australia

All	UK	subsidiaries	individually	prepare	and	file	their	own	financial	statements.

The	principal	place	of	business	is	considered	to	be	the	registered	address.

18. Trade and other receivables

Trade	receivables	

Amounts	due	from	Group	undertakings	

Other	debtors	

Prepayments	

Accrued	income	

Group 

Company

2021	
£’000		

10,165	

-	

48	

595	

2,554	

2020	
£’000	

7,970	

-	

66	

567	

1,534	

13,362 

10,137 

2021	
£’000		

9,553	

1,096	

40	

592	

2,554	

13,835 

2020		 	
£’000

7,241	

1,811

61

564

1,534

11,211

85

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

Trade receivables	

Ageing	of	receivables:	

Less	than	30	days	

31	to	60	days	

61	to	90	days	

91	to	120	days	

Group 

Company

2021	

£’000	

7,070	

126	

2,099	

870	

2020	

£’000	

6,629	

155	

386	

800	

10,165 

7,970 

2021	

£’000	

6,458	

126	

2,099	

870	

9,553 

2020	

£’000

5,981

74

386

800

7,241

The	average	credit	period	taken	on	sales	of	goods	and	services	was	80	days	(2020:	69	days).

In	accordance	with	IFRS	9,	the	Group	performed	a	year	end	impairment	exercise	to	determine	whether	any	write	down	in	amounts	

receivable	was	required,	using	an	expected	credit	loss	model.	The	expected	loss	rate	for	receivables	less	than	120	days	old	is	0%.

In	determining	the	recoverability	of	a	trade	receivable	the	Group	considers	any	change	in	the	credit	quality	of	the	trade	receivable	from	the	

date	credit	was	initially	granted	up	to	the	reporting	date.	

Definition of default

The	loss	allowance	on	all	financial	assets	is	measured	by	considering	the	probability	of	default.

Receivables	are	considered	to	be	in	default	when	the	principal	or	any	interest	is	significantly	more	than	the	associated	credit	terms	past	

due,	based	on	an	assessment	of	past	payment	practices	and	the	likelihood	of	such	overdue	amounts	being	recovered.

Determination of credit-impaired financial assets

The	Group	considers	financial	assets	to	be	‘credit-impaired’	when	the	following	events,	or	combinations	of	several	events,	have	occurred	

before	the	year	end:

	z significant	financial	difficulty	of	the	counterparty	arising	from	significant	downturns	in	operating	results	and/or	significant	unavoidable	 
	 	 cash	requirements	when	the	counterparty	has	insufficient	finance	from	internal	working	capital	resources,	external	funding	and/or	 

	 	 group	support;	
	z a	breach	of	contract,	including	receipts	being	more	than	materially	past	due;	
	z it	becoming	probable	that	the	counterparty	will	enter	bankruptcy	or	liquidation.

Write-off policy

Receivables	are	written	off	by	the	Group	when	there	is	no	reasonable	expectation	of	recovery,	such	as	when	the	counterparty	is	known	to	

be	going	bankrupt,	or	into	liquidation	or	administration.	During	the	year,	no	trade	receivables	were	considered	impaired	(2020:	one	trade	

receivable)	and	there	was	a	charge	of	nil	to	the	Income	Statement	as	shown	in	note	6	(2020:	£57k).

Additionally	the	recoverability	of	intercompany	debts	is	considered.	After	review,	the	Directors	believe	that	no	further	expected	credit	loss	

provision	is	required.	The	policy	of	credit	risk	management	is	covered	in	note	32.	

19. Inventories

Finished	goods	and	goods	for	resale	 	

There	was	no	write	down	in	the	recognised	value	of	inventories	(2020:	nil).

Group 

Company

2021	

£’000		

129 

2020	

£’000	

1,266 

2021	

£’000		

4 

2020		 	

£’000

7 

86

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
20. Trade and other payables

Trade	payables	

Amounts	owed	to	Group	undertakings	

Other	taxes	and	social	security	

Other	creditors	

Accruals	

Deferred	income	

Group 

Company 

2021	

£’000		

1,450	

-	

274	

36	

2,643	

6,288	

10,691 

2020	

£’000	

3,403	

-	

531	

22	

1,364	

4,057	

9,377 

2021	

£’000		

588	

1,932	

242	

36	

2,216	

6,179	

11,193 

2020		 	

£’000

2,208

465	

487

22

1,098

3,997

8,277

There	is	no	material	difference	between	the	fair	value	of	receivables	and	their	carrying	value.

Trade	payables	comprise	amounts	outstanding	for	trade	purchases	and	ongoing	costs.	The	average	credit	period	taken	for	trade	purchases	

across	the	year	is	40	days		(2020:	46	days).	Their	carrying	value	approximates	to	their	fair	value.

21. Lease liabilities

Lease	obligations	

Leases	

Balance	at	1	April	2020	

Arising	in	the	year	

Interest	

Repaid	during	the	year	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Repayable	within	one	year	

Repayable	within	more	than	one	year	 	

Group 

Company 

2021	

£’000		

277	

277 

2020	

£’000	

-	

- 

2021	

£’000		

236	

236 

2020		 	

£’000

-

-

2021	

£’000		

2020	

£’000	

2021	

£’000		

2020		 	

£’000

-	

333	

23	

(79)	

277 

83	

194	

-	

-	

-	

-	

- 

-	

-	

-	

264	

22	

(50)	

236 

45	

191	

At	31	March	2021	there	were	no	undrawn	facilities	(2020:	nil).	

The	Group	has	applied	IFRS	16	Leases	for	the	first	time	for	the	year	commencing	1	April	2020.

The	Group	has	applied	the	modified	approach	from	1	April	2020	but	has	not	restated	comparatives	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2020	as	

permitted	under	the	specific	transitional	provisions	in	the	standard.	The	net	asset	value	of	at	year	end	was	£0.26m	(2020:	£nil).	

-

-	

-

-

-

-

-

87

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

22. Share capital

Ordinary	shares	of	2p	each

Authorised	

Issued	and	fully	paid	up

Share 

capital	

£’000	

2021		

Share  

premium	

£’000	

Share 

capital	

£’000	

Shares	

2020

Share

premium

£’000

Shares	

	 50,000,000	

1,000	

		 50,000,000	

1,000

Balance	at	1	April	2020	

	 40,417,556		

Issued	during	year	

-	

Balance at 31 March 2021 

  40,417,556 

808	

-	

808 

3,365	

39,700,889		

-	

716,667		

3,365 

40,417,556 

794	

14	

808 

2,624

741

3,365

The	Company	issued	nil	(2020:	716,667)	Ordinary	shares	during	the	year	to	satisfy	share	option	exercise	requirements.	In	2020,	these	were	

issued	in	one	tranche	at	a	price	of	105.47p.	This	increased	the	share	premium	account	by	nil	(2020:	£741k).	

Costs	associated	with	the	issue	of	new	shares	were	nil	(2020:	less	than	£1k)	and	are	recognised	in	professional	fees.

23. Own shares

At	the	year	end	the	Company	held	191,498	(2020:	159,133)	ordinary	shares	in	Treasury,	with	Fair	Value	of	£579,281	(2020:	£222,786).	

Details	of	purchases	and	sales	are	shown	below.	

Number	of	

Share	price	at	point	

Total	Consideration	

own	shares	

of	transaction	in	pence	

paid	£’000

Balance of own shares at 1 April 2019 

Shares	acquired	into	Treasury	reserve	

Shares	sold	out	of	Treasury	reserve	

 478,880 

45,208	

(364,955)	

	125.00	-	230.00		

	202.50	-	259.00		

Balance of own shares at 31 March 2020 

159,133  

Total consideration paid in year end 31 March 2020 

Shares	acquired	into	Treasury	reserve	

Shares	sold	out	of	Treasury	reserve	

335,032		

(302,667)	

	219.27	-	285.00		

	230.00	-	285.00		

Balance of own shares at 31 March 2021 

 191,498  

Total consideration paid in year end 31 March 2021 

69

69

	868	

868 

In	the	Statement	of	Changes	in	Equity	(page	62)	the	value	of	Treasury	shares	is	calculated	on	a	First-In-First-Out	(FIFO)	basis,	while	the	Fair	

Value	represents	the	value	based	on	the	year	end	share	price.

88

 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
 
  
 
	
		
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
	
		
	
	
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24. Merger reserve

The	merger	reserve	arose	on	the	acquisition	of	Speed-Trap	Holdings	Ltd	(23	January	2015)	and	represents	the	excess	consideration	paid	

by	the	issue	of	shares	over	the	share	capital	nominal	value.	Additions	to	this	reserve	of	nil	(2020:	£4k)	are	a	result	of	the	exercise	of	options	

issued	which	have	been	held	in	the	own	shares	and	equity	reserve	accounts.

25. Revaluation reserve

This	represents	the	gains	on	revaluation	of	the	property	in	line	with	market	valuations.	The	property	was	last	professionally	revalued	as	at 	

March	2018.	The	gain	on	revaluation	was	£70k	(2020:	£71k).	This	is	a	non-distributable	reserve	as	it	represents	unrealised	profits	on	the 	

revalued	assets.

26. Equity reserve

This	is	in	relation	to	the	options	issued	following	the	Speed-Trap	acquisition	in	2015	and	represents	the	fair	value	less	the	cash	received	to 	

exercise	those	options.	As	all	options	had	been	exercised	by	31	March	2020,	the	fair	value	at	the	balance	sheet	date	is	nil	(2020:	nil).	The 	

outstanding	balance	of	these	options	is	included	in	the	balance	at	1	April	2020	and	31	March	2021,	as	applicable,	in	note	27.	There	is	no 	

deferred	tax	asset	at	the	year	end	(2020:	nil).

27. Share-based payments

The	Company	has	share	option	schemes	for	various	employees	of	the	Group,	a	combination	of	both	EMI	and	non-EMI	schemes.	Share	

options	vest	in	equal	instalments	over	three	years	based	on	previously	set	EPS	targets	based	upon	10%	growth.	In	relation	to	the	share	

options	shown	below	the	Board	forecast	that	the	remaining	share	options	will	vest.

Options	are	granted	at	the	closing	price	on	the	previous	day	and	have	a	vesting	period	of	three	years.	If	the	options	are	not	exercised	within	

ten	years	of	the	grant	date,	or	if	employees	leave	before	their	options	vest	then	those	options	are	forfeited.

Vested	options	are	settled	subsequently	by	a	combination	of	equity	shares	in	the	parent	company	and	cash	at	Board	discretion.

Balance	at	1	April	

Granted	during	the	year	

Exercised	during	the	year	

Balance at 31 March 

2021 

Weighted	

2020

Weighted

	 No.	of	share	

av.	exercise	 No.	of	share	

av.	exercise

options	

price	

options	

price

733,833		

134.01p		

1,790,455		

113.19p	

595,176		

2.00p		

25,000		

205.00p	

(302,667)	

133.34p		

(1,081,622)	

101.20p	

1,026,342  

57.65p  

733,833  

134.01p

Exercisable at year end 

119,750 

 120.02p 

106,500 

 120.95p

The	weighted	average	share	price	at	the	exercise	date	of	the	exercised	shares	was	£2.660	(2020:	£2.562).	The	weighted	average	

contractual	life	of	the	outstanding	options	was	9	years	(2020:	7	years),	exercisable	in	the	range	2.00p	to	205.00p. 

302,667	share	options	were	exercised	in	the	year,	by	issue	of	shares	from	Treasury.	

A summary of	the	option	price	ranges	are	as	follows: 

2021

Exercisable	
Number	of
price	range	 share	options

2.00p	

90.50p	to	114.00p	

149.00p	to	205.00p	

595,176

216,500

214,666

1,026,342

89

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
  
 
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

The	Group	recognised	£318k	(2020:	£97k)	of	expense	related	to	equity-settled	share-based	payments	in	the	year,	£276k	as	share-based	

payments	and	£42k	as	Er	NI	(2020:	£97k	as	share-based	payments,	£nil	as	Er	NI).

The	fair	value	of	options	granted	during	the	year	is	determined	by	applying	the	Monte	Carlo	model.	The	expense	is	apportioned	over	the	

vesting	period	of	the	option	and	is	based	on	the	number	which	are	expected	to	vest	and	the	fair	value	of	those	options	at	the	date	of	grant.

On	10	August	2020	the	Company		granted	the	Executive	Directors	a	Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	(“LTIP”).	The	awards	have	an	exercise	price	of	

two	pence	per	Share	and	will	vest	three	years	after	grant,	subject	to	the	terms	of	the	LTIP,	including	continued	employment	and	the	satisfaction	

of	performance	conditions,	based	on	the	Company’s	relative	total	shareholder	return	and	EPS.

The	inputs	into	the	Monte	Carlo	model	in	respect	of	options	granted	this	year	are	as	follows: 

Date	of	Grant	

Vesting	date	

Number	of	options	granted	

Share	price	at	date	of	grant	

Exercise	price	

Option	life	in	years	

Risk-free	rate	

Expected	volatility	

Expected	dividend	yield	

Fair	value	of	options	

	 10 Aug 2020 

8 Jan 2021 

8 Jan 2021 

8 Jan 2021 

25 Jan 2021

	 09 Aug 2023 

15 Jul 2022 

15 Jul 2023 

15 Jul 2024  10 Aug 2023 

362,976	

302.50p	

2.00p	

10	

0.79%	

59,400	

59,400	

59,400		

54,000

302.50p	

302.50p	

302.50p		

302.50p

2.00p	

10	

0.79%	

2.00p	

10	

0.79%	

2.00p		

10	

0.79%		

32.10%	

32.10%	

32.10%	

32.10%	

0.98%	

0.98%	

0.98%	

0.98%	

206.11p	

303.30p	

303.02p	

312.49p	

303.95p

2.00p

10	

0.79%

38.50%

0.98%

The	inputs	into	the	Black	Scholes	model	of	options	previously	granted	which	have	contributed	to	the	share	based	payment	arising	this	year	are: 

Date	of	Grant	

Vesting	date	

Number	of	options	granted	

Share	price	at	date	of	grant	

Exercise	price	

Option	life	in	years	

Risk-free	rate	

Expected	volatility	

Expected	dividend	yield	

Fair	value	of	options		

	 15 Dec 2017  13 Aug 2018  13 Aug 2018 

14 Jan 2020 

14 Jan 2020 

14 Jan 2020

01 Jul 2020 

01 Jul 2020 

01 Jul 2021 

14 Jan 2021 

14 Jan 2022 

14 Jan 2022

141,500	

114.00p	

114.00p	

10	

166,667	

149.00p	

149.00p	

2	

166,666	

149.00p	

149.00p	

8,334	

8,333	

205.00p		

205.00p	

205.00p		

205.00p	

8,333

205.00p

205.00p

3	

10	

10	

10	

3.10%	

3.18%	

3.18%	

3.25%	

3.25%	

37.00%	

40.90%	

40.90%	

38.50%		

38.50%	

1.75%	

28.87p	

2.11%	

33.72p	

2.11%	

40.37p	

1.17%	

32.79p	

1.17%	

46.33p	

3.25%

38.50%

1.17%

56.36p

Expected	volatility	was	determined	by	calculating	the	historical	volatility	of	the	Group’s	share	price	for	the	5	year	period	prior	to	the	date	of	grant	

of	the	share	option.	The	expected	life	used	in	the	model	is	based	on	management’s	best	estimate.	The	Group	did	not	enter	into	any	share-based	

payment	transactions	with	parties	other	than	employees	during	the	current	or	previous	period.

28. Operating lease arrangements (Group and Company)

As lessee

Lease payments recognised as an expense during the year 

Lease	payments	for	rental	of	premises	in	India

90

2021	

£’000	

-	

2020

£’000

58

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
Total value of future minimum lease payments committed under  non-cancellable operating leases:	

Not	later	than	one	year	

Later	than	one	year	and	not	later	than	five	years	

Later	than	five	years	

2021	

£’000	

-	

-	

-	

2020

£’000

61	

278	

32

No	lease	payments	are	disclosed	above	for	the	year	ended	31	March	2021	as	the	Directors	have	decided,	with	effect	from	1	April	2020,	

to	implement	IFRS	16	and	recognise	all	significant	leases	(where	the	Group	is	the	lessee)	as	Right	of	Use	assets	(see	note	16).	The	

corresponding	lease	liability	associated	with	these	leases	is	disclosed	within	note	21	to	these	financial	statements.

As lessor

Lease receipts recognised as income during the year	

Lease	receipts	are	for	a	fixed-term	two	year	sub-let	of	parts	of	the	parent	Company’s	premises 	 
which	was	extended	immediately	after	the	year	end	and	is	subject	to	a	three	month	notice	period.

2021	

£’000	

58	

2020

£’000

58

A	reconciliation	of	total	operating	lease	commitments	disclosed	at	31	March	2020	to	the	lease	liability	amount	recognised	on	adoption	of 	
IFRS	16	is	as	follows:

Lease	commitments	under	non-cancellable	operating	lease	@	31	March	2020.	

Variable	lease	payments	not	recognised	

Minor	adjustments	due	to	commitment	disclosures	

Operating	lease	liabilities	before	discounting	

Discounted	using	incremental	borrowing	rate	

Lease	liability	recognised	under	IFRS	16	@	1	April	2021	

29. Related party transactions

During	the	year	the	parent	Company	undertook	the	following	transactions	with	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.,	a	wholly	owned	US	subsidiary:

Sales	to	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.	

Purchases	from	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.	

Management	charge	to	cover	services	provided	(from	D4t4	Solutions	plc	to	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.)	

Management	charge	to	cover	services	provided	(from	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.	to	D4t4	Solutions	plc)	

Interest	charged	on	Intercompany	loan	(from	D4t4	Solutions	plc	to	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.)	

Payments	made	by	D4t4	Solutions	plc	on	behalf	of	D4t4	Solutions	Inc.	

2021	

£’000	

1	

3,837	

30	

2,481	

67	

5,517	

£’000

371

(13)	

(57)	

301

(58)

243

2020

£’000

1

2,905	

35	

2,261

-

4,008

Details	of	any	intercompany	balances	outstanding	are	shown	in	Notes	18	and	20.									

During	the	year,	the	Company	entered	into	an	arm’s	length	transaction	with	P.	Kear,	a	director,	relating	to	the	disposal	of	a	vehicle.	The	

Company	had	the	asset	independently	valued	at	£8k	and	it	was	sold	to	P	Kear	for	£8k.	The	Company	had	fully	depreciated	the	asset	to	£nil	

on	the	date	of	the	transaction.													

Other	than	the	payment	of	remuneration	and	any	dividend	income	from	their	disclosed	shareholding	in	the	Company,	there	have	been	no	

related	party	transactions	with	the	Directors.		

91

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

30. Group reconciliation of profit before corporation tax to cash generated from operations

Operating Activities

Profit	before	tax	

Adjustments for:

Depreciation	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

Amortisation	of	intangible	assets	

Currency	movements	

Finance	income	

Finance	expense	

Share-based	payments	

Settlement	of	share-based	payments	 	

Gain	on	sale	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital 

(Increase)		in	receivables	

Decrease	/	(Increase)	in	inventories	

Increase	in	payables	

Cash generated from operations 

31. Group cash and cash equivalents 

Group 

Company

2021	

£’000	

2020	

£’000	

2021	

£’000	

2020

£’000

3,043 

4,969 

1,973 

3,962

395	

279	

-	

(25)	

32	

276	

42	

(8)	

4,034 

(3,225)	

1,137	

1,312	

3,258 

327	

246	

-	

(43)	

-	

97	

-	

-	

5,596 

(3,862)	

(1,221)	

2,603	

3,116 

366	

279	

(30)	

(91)	

25	

276	

42	

(8)	

2,832 

(2,624)	

3	

2,914	

3,125 

327

246

-

(43)

-

97

-

-

4,589

(2,770)

6

1,213

3,038

The	amounts	disclosed	in	the	statements	of	cash	flow	in	respect	of	cash	and	cash	equivalents	are	in	respect	of	these	statements	of	

financial	position	amounts:

As	at	1	April	2019	

As	at	31	March	2020	

As at 31 March 2021 

Group	

£’000	

10,996	

12,772	

14,241 

Company

£’000

10,996

12,694

14,133

32. Financial instruments and risk management

General objectives, policies and processes

The	Board	has	overall	responsibility	for	the	determination	of	the	Group’s	risk	management	objectives	and	policies	and,	whilst	retaining	

responsibility	for	them,	it	has	delegated	the	authority	for	designing	and	operating	processes	that	ensure	the	effective	implementation	of	the	

objectives	and	policies	to	the	Executive	Team.

The	Board	receives	monthly	reports	from	the	Executives	through	which	it	reviews	the	effectiveness	of	the	processes	put	in	place	and	the	

appropriateness	of	the	objectives	and	policies	it	sets.

Capital Management policy

Management	considers	capital	to	comprise	issued	share	capital,	reserves	and	borrowings,	along	with	cash	and	cash	equivalents.

The	Group	manages	its	capital	to	ensure	it	operations	are	adequately	provided	for,	while	maximising	the	return	to	shareholders	through	

effective	management	of	its	resources.	The	principal	financial	risks	faced	by	the	Group	are	liquidity	risk,	interest	rate	risk	and	foreign	

exchange	rate	risk.	The	Directors	review	and	agree	policies	for	managing	each	of	these	risks.	These	policies	remain	unchanged	from	

previous	years.

92

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
The	Group’s	objectives	when	managing	capital	are	to	safeguard	its	ability	to	continue	as	a	going	concern	and	so	provide	returns	for	

shareholders.	The	Group	meets	its	objectives	by	aiming	to	achieve	growth	which	will	generate	regular	and	increasing	returns	to	shareholders.	

The	Group	manages	the	capital	structure	and	makes	changes	in	light	of	changes	in	economic	conditions.	In	order	to	maintain	or	adjust	the	

capital	structure,	the	Group	may	adjust	the	amount	of	dividends	paid	to	shareholders.

Capital risk management

The	Group	and	Company’s	capital	structure,	as	defined	above,	is	managed	by	the	Board	to	ensure	that	the	Group	and	Company	continues	

as	a	profitable	going	concern.	There	are	no	externally	imposed	capital	requirements.

The	Group	has	no	net	debt	(2020:	nil). 

Cash	and	cash	equivalents	

Net	cash	

Categories of financial instruments	

Financial Assets at Amortised Cost  

Cash	and	bank	balances	

Trade	and	other	receivables	

Financial Liabilities at Amortised Cost 

Trade	and	other	payables	

Group 

Company

2021	

£’000	

14,241	

14,241	

2021	

£’000	

14,241	

12,767	

2020	

£’000	

12,772	

12,772	

2020	

£’000	

12,772	

9,570	

2021	

£’000	

14,133	

14,133	

2021	

£’000	

14,133	

13,243	

2020

£’000

12,694

12,694

2020

£’000

12,694

10,647

4,129	

4,789	

4,772	

3,793

Foreign currency risk management

The	Group’s	foreign	currency	exposure	arises	from:

	z Transactions	(sales/purchases)	denominated	in	foreign	currencies;	and
	z Monetary	items	(mainly	cash	and	receivables)	denominated	in	foreign	currencies

The	exposure	to	transactional	foreign	exchange	risk	is	monitored	and	managed	at	a	Group	level.	Natural	hedging	is	employed,	to	the	extent	

possible,	to	minimise	net	exposures;	however,	where	significant	exposures	arise	it	is	Group	policy	to	enter	into	formal	hedging	arrangements.

Carrying	amounts	of	the	Group’s	financial	assets	and	liabilities	denominated	in	foreign	currencies	was	as	follows:

US Dollars

-	cash	

-	receivables	

-	payables	

Euros

-	cash	

-	receivables	

-	payables	

Liabilities 

Assets

2021	
£’000	

2020	
£’000	

-	

-	

-	

-	

1,511	

1,626	

-	

-	

35	

-	

-	

26	

2021	
£’000	

530	

8,903	

-	

178	

36	

-	

2020
£’000

2,907

6,464

-

167

26

-

The	following	table	shows	the	effect	on	the	Group’s	result	for	the	year	of	the	£	strengthening	by	5%	against	debtor,	creditor	and	cash	

balances	denominated	in	foreign	currencies,	with	all	other	variables	held	constant.	5%	represents	management’s	assessment	of	the	

reasonably	possible	change	in	exchange	rates.

93

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements  
 
                         
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
Notes to the financial statements
(continued)

At 31 March 2021

Impact	on	profit	/	equity	for	the	year	

At 31 March 2020

Impact	on	profit	/	equity	for	the	year	

$	

£’000	

€	

£’000	

(377)	

(367)	

(9)	

(8)	

Total

£’000

(386)

(375)

The	following	table	shows	the	effect	on	the	Group’s	result	for	the	year	of	the	£	weakening	by	5%	against	debtor,	creditor	and	cash	balances	

denominated	in	foreign	currencies,	with	all	other	variables	held	constant.	5%	represents	management’s	assessment	of	the	reasonably	

possible	change	in	exchange	rates.

At 31 March 2021

Impact	on	profit	/	equity	for	the	year	

At 31 March 2020

Impact	on	profit	/	equity	for	the	year	

$	

£’000	

417	

411	

€	

£’000	

9	

9	

Total

£’000

426

420

Credit risk management

The	Group	uses	credit	reference	agencies	to	determine	and	monitor	the	credit	limits	of	new	and	existing	customers.	At	the	end	of	the	year	

two	partners	owed	a	total	of	£9.020m	(2020:	two	partners	owed	£5.851m)	and	no	expected	credit	loss	provision	has	been	made	in	relation	

to	this	balance.	No	other	customers	/	partners	owed	more	than	10%	of	the	outstanding	total.	No	expected	credit	loss	provision	has	been	

recognised	for	trade	receivables	at	31	March	2021	(2020:	nil).

The	Group’s	customers	primarily	consist	of	banks,	partners	and	other	longstanding	customers,	primarily	blue-chip	companies	that	are	

deemed	to	have	a	low	credit	risk.	As	a	result,	the	credit	quality	of	trade	receivables	that	are	neither	past	due	nor	impaired	has	been	

assessed	by	the	Directors	to	be	relatively	high,	taking	account	of	a	low	historic	experience	of	bad	debts	and	relatively	good	ageing	profiles.

The	Group	controls	its	exposure	to	credit	risk	by	setting	limits	on	its	exposure	to	individual	customers,	compliance	is	monitored	by	the	

Credit	Control	Team.	As	part	of	the	process	of	setting	customer	credit	limits,	different	external	credit	reference	agencies	are	used,	according	

to	the	country	of	the	customer.	The	Group	has	a	policy	of	dealing	only	with	creditworthy	counterparts.

The	Group	manages	the	credit	risk	and	quality	of	cash	balances	by	holding	balances	with	reputable	banks.

Liquidity risk management

The	Board	manages	liquidity	risk	by	maintaining	adequate	reserves	of	cash	and	banking	facilities	to	cover	day-to-day	trading.	The	Group’s	

policy	is	to	pay	creditors	in	full	as	and	when	they	become	due,	which	for	all	practical	purposes	is	at	latest	by	the	end	of	the	month	following	

the	invoice	date.	The	Board	believes	that	there	is	little	liquidity	risk	since	the	Group	has	adequate	cash	balances	to	satisfy	its	creditors.

Maturity analysis of financial liabilities

In less than one year:

Trade	payables	

Amounts	owed	to	Group	undertakings	

Other	creditors	

Accruals	

94

                                             Group 

  Company

2021	

£’000	

2020	

£’000	

2021	

£’000	

1,450	

3,403	

2,055	

-	

36	

2,598	

4,084 

-	

22	

1,364	

4,789 

465	

36	

2,171	

4,727 

2020

£’000

2,208

465

22

1,098

3,793

 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
All	of	the	financial	liabilities	above	are	recorded	in	the	financial	statements	at	amortised	cost.	The	above	maturity	analysis	amounts	reflect	

the	contractual	undiscounted	cash	flows,	including	future	interest	charges,	which	may	differ	from	the	carrying	values	of	the	liabilities	at	the	

reporting	date.

Interest rate risk management

The	Group’s	exposure	to	changes	in	interest	rate	risk	is	immaterial	as	the	loan	and	mortgage	were	repaid	during	the	year.	The	Board	of	

Directors	monitor	movements	in	interest	rates	and	have	not	prepared	sensitivity	analysis	in	relation	to	interest	rates	as	they	do	not	believe	

that	any	reasonable	variance	would	have	a	material	impact	on	the	Group	and	there	are	no	such	financial	liabilities	at	the	year	end.

Fair value measurement

Financial	instruments	that	are	measured	subsequent	to	initial	recognition	at	fair	value,	are	grouped	into	Levels	1	to	3	based	on	the	degree	to	

which	the	fair	value	is	observable:

	z Level	1	fair	value	measurements	are	those	derived	from	quoted	prices	(unadjusted)	in	active	markets	for	identical	assets	or	liabilities;
	z Level	2	fair	value	measurements	are	those	derived	from	inputs	other	than	quoted	prices	included	within	Level	1	that	are	observable	for	 

the	asset	or	liability,	either	directly	(i.e.	as	prices)	or	indirectly	(i.e.	derived	from	prices);	and

	z Level	3	fair	value	measurements	are	those	derived		from	valuation	techniques	that	include	inputs	for	the	asset	or	liability	that	are	not	 
	 	 based	on	observable	market	data	(unobservable	inputs).

The	freehold	land	and	buildings	are	observable	at	Level	2.

The	Group’s	freehold	land	and	buildings	are	stated	at	their	revalued	amounts,	being	the	fair	value	at	the	date	of	the	revaluation	at	31	March	

2021.	The	fair	value	measurements	of	the	Group’s	freehold	land	and	buildings	as	at	31	March	2018	were	performed	by	De	Souza	&	Co,	

independent	valuers	not	related	to	the	Group.	De	Souza	&	Co	are	members	of	the	Royal	Institution	of	Chartered	Surveyors,	and	they	have	

appropriate	qualifications	and	recent	experience	in	the	fair	value	measurement	of	properties	in	the	relevant	location.	The	valuation	was	

prepared	in	accordance	with	the	RICS	Valuation	-	Global	Standards	2017	and	the	International	Valuation	Standards	and	was	based	on	

recent	market	transactions	on	arm’s	length	terms	for	similar	properties.	

The	Directors	have	considered	the	impact	of	global	pandemic	and	whether	it	has	had	any	impact	on	the	value	of	the	land	and	buildings	

of	the	Group.	In	their	opinion,	the	property	has	not	suffered	any	reduction	in	value	on	account	of	it’s	accessibility,	location	and	the	internal	

refurbishment	works	which	commenced	three	years	ago	and	which	were	not	therefore	not	fully	incorporated	into	the	2018	revaluation.	The	

building	is	also	considered	to	be	suitably	arranged	internally	such	that	any	modifications	required	to	the	workplace	in	order	to	allow	for	safe	

working	in	light	of	the	global	pandemic	can	be	readily	implemented.	

The	fair	value	of	the	freehold	land	and	buildings	were	determined	based	on	the	market	comparable	approach	that	reflects	recent	

transaction	prices	for	similar	properties.	10	similar	properties	with	sales	within	the	last	two	years,	and	within	10	miles	were	used	as	the	

basis	for	comparison	using	both	sales	value	and	letting	rates	to	determine	the	valuation.

In	order	to	determine	the	apportionment	of	the	fair	value	between	land	and	buildings,	firstly	the	value	of	industrial	development	land	in	the	

broad	area	of	the	property	was	assessed,	and	secondly	an	allowance	for	age	and	obsolescence	was	applied	to	the	likely	rebuilding	costs	of	

a	modern	equivalent.

The	Directors	are	satisfied	that	the	assumptions	applied	in	the	professional	valuation	at	31	March	2018	are	still	valid	at	31	March	2021,	and	

as	such	have	revalued	the	land	and	buildings	in	line	with	the	2018	valuation.	

95

Annual Report & Accounts 2021Financial Statements	 	
		
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
 
Corporate information

Registered office

Windmill	House 

91-93	Windmill	Road 

Sunbury-on-Thames 

Surrey 

TW16	7EF

Solicitor 

Moore	Barlow	LLP 

Concord	House 

Company registration number

01892751 

Bank

HSBC	Bank	plc 

54	Clarence	Street 

165	Church	Street	East 

Kingston	Upon	Thames 

Woking 

Surrey 

GU21	6HJ	

Surrey 

KT1	1NS

Nominated Adviser & Joint Broker

Joint Broker

finnCap 

Canaccord	Genuity	Limited 

One	Bartholomew	Close 

88	Wood	Street 

London 

EC2V	7QR

London 

EC1A	7BL	

Financial PR

Instinctif	Partners 

65	Gresham	Street 

London 

EC2V	7NQ

Registrars

SLC	Registrars 

P.O.	Box	5222 

Lancing 

West Sussex 

BN99	3HH 

Auditor

RSM	UK	Audit	LLP 

25	Farringdon	Street 

London 

EC4A	4AB

96

 
 
 
 
“With the launch of 
our new fraud offering, 
and with our improved 
revenue visibility, order 
book and pipeline,  
we are optimistic about 
the year ahead”

PETER KEAR
Chief Executive Officer

 
D4t4 Solutions plc 

Windmill	House 
91-93	Windmill	Road 
Sunbury-on-Thames 
TW16	7EF

www.d4t4solutions.com

Company Registration Number 01892751